1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
70 \font_sf_scale 100 100
71 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \use_dash_ligatures false
75 \default_output_format default
77 \bibtex_command bibtex
78 \index_command default
79 \float_placement class
80 \float_alignment class
84 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
85 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
89 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
90 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
91 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
96 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
97 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
100 \use_package amsmath 1
101 \use_package amssymb 1
102 \use_package cancel 1
104 \use_package mathdots 1
105 \use_package mathtools 1
106 \use_package mhchem 1
107 \use_package stackrel 1
108 \use_package stmaryrd 1
109 \use_package undertilde 1
111 \cite_engine_type default
115 \paperorientation portrait
121 \notefontcolor #0000ff
138 \paragraph_separation skip
141 \math_numbering_side default
142 \quotes_style english
146 \paperpagestyle default
148 \tracking_changes true
149 \output_changes false
153 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
154 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
155 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
167 by the \SpecialChar LyX
172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
174 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
175 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
176 Documentation mailing list:
177 \begin_inset CommandInset href
179 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
199 \begin_inset Note Note
202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
203 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
204 \begin_inset Newline newline
209 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
217 \begin_layout Standard
218 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
219 LatexCommand tableofcontents
226 \begin_layout Chapter
230 \begin_layout Section
231 What is \SpecialChar LyX
235 \begin_layout Standard
237 is a document preparation system.
238 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
239 scripts, publishable books, business
240 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
241 It is unlike most other
242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
249 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
251 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
264 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
267 pt type, left justified, 5
268 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
277 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
281 \begin_layout Standard
282 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
287 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
291 \begin_layout Standard
296 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
297 's philosophy: most importantly,
298 the format of all of the manuals.
299 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
300 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
306 manual describes that, too.
309 \begin_layout Section
314 \begin_layout Standard
315 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
316 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
318 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
319 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
323 \begin_layout Standard
324 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
325 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
326 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
328 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
329 only a vertical scrollbar.
330 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
331 The first case is large images.
332 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
333 image and use the option
344 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
347 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
348 this doesn't work for equations yet.
351 \begin_layout Standard
352 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
353 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
361 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
368 \begin_layout Section
372 \begin_layout Standard
373 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
375 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
377 Just select the manual you want to read from the
384 \begin_layout Section
385 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
387 \begin_inset CommandInset label
389 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
396 \begin_layout Standard
397 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
398 can be configured via the menu
400 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
404 \begin_inset Index idx
407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
414 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
416 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
417 packages are available.
418 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
420 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
422 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
423 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
427 \begin_inset space \space{}
430 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
431 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
433 To force \SpecialChar LyX
434 to re-inspect your system, you should use
436 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
440 \begin_inset Index idx
443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
444 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
450 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
451 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
454 \begin_layout Section
457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
459 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
466 \begin_layout Standard
467 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
468 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
469 installed, but you will not be
470 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
471 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
472 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
473 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
474 document can always be output as plain text
478 \begin_layout Standard
479 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
480 or DocBook classes or packages.
481 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
482 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
485 \begin_layout Standard
486 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
487 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
488 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
491 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
499 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
500 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
503 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
507 \begin_inset Index idx
510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
511 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
519 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
526 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
530 \begin_layout Chapter
531 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
535 \begin_layout Section
536 Basic File Operations
537 \begin_inset Index idx
540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
549 \begin_layout Standard
554 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
555 in addition to some more advanced operations:
558 \begin_layout Itemize
580 \begin_layout Itemize
596 arg "buffer-new-template"
602 \begin_layout Itemize
624 \begin_layout Itemize
632 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
636 \begin_layout Itemize
638 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
650 \begin_layout Itemize
662 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
666 \begin_layout Itemize
668 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
676 \begin_layout Itemize
698 \begin_layout Itemize
710 arg "buffer-write-as"
714 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
718 \begin_layout Itemize
720 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
736 \begin_layout Itemize
750 \begin_layout Itemize
764 \begin_layout Standard
765 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
766 a few minor differences.
769 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
780 command lists the available templates.
781 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
782 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
783 and possibly propose text fragments
785 for the document, features
786 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
789 you would otherwise need to
790 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
792 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
796 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
800 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
808 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
814 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
815 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
819 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
827 \begin_layout Standard
828 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
860 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
861 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
862 is just that — a big, blank space.
870 \begin_layout Standard
891 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
896 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
899 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
917 will reload the document from disk.
918 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
919 and want to restore it to the last save.
928 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
929 them as your changes.
932 \begin_layout Section
933 Basic Editing Features
934 \begin_inset Index idx
937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
944 \begin_inset CommandInset label
946 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
953 \begin_layout Standard
954 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
955 can perform cut and paste operations
956 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
957 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
958 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
959 editing features and how to access
961 We will start with cut and paste.
964 \begin_layout Standard
965 As you might expect, the
969 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
970 various other editing features.
971 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
975 \begin_layout Itemize
981 \begin_inset Index idx
984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1013 \begin_layout Itemize
1019 \begin_inset Index idx
1022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1051 \begin_layout Itemize
1057 \begin_inset Index idx
1060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1085 \begin_layout Itemize
1089 \begin_inset space ~
1095 \begin_layout Itemize
1099 \begin_inset space ~
1105 \begin_layout Itemize
1109 \begin_inset space ~
1113 \begin_inset space ~
1119 \begin_inset Index idx
1122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1131 \begin_inset Index idx
1134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1149 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1159 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1165 \begin_layout Standard
1166 The first three are self-explanatory.
1167 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1168 and other programs by
1189 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1190 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1195 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1196 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1197 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1198 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1199 into individual cells.
1203 \begin_inset space ~
1208 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1209 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1213 \begin_layout Standard
1217 \begin_inset space ~
1222 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1224 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1226 \begin_inset space ~
1233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1239 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1240 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1241 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1247 \begin_inset space \space{}
1250 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1251 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1254 \begin_inset space ~
1257 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1259 \begin_inset space ~
1263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1276 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1277 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1279 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1288 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1289 start a new paragraph.
1290 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1291 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1296 \begin_inset space ~
1299 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1305 \begin_inset space ~
1313 \begin_inset space ~
1316 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1319 paste from the primary selection.
1320 This is normally the currently selected text.
1323 \begin_layout Standard
1326 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1328 \begin_inset space ~
1332 \begin_inset space ~
1340 \begin_inset space ~
1344 \begin_inset space ~
1350 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1356 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1359 \begin_inset space ~
1368 \begin_inset space ~
1373 button to skip the current word.
1377 \begin_inset space ~
1382 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1386 \begin_inset space ~
1391 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1393 If the toggle is set, searching for
1394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1405 will not match the word
1406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1420 Match whole words only
1422 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1423 to only find complete words, e.
1424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1453 offers also an advanced
1456 \begin_inset space ~
1460 \begin_inset space ~
1465 feature that is described in section
1466 \begin_inset space ~
1470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1472 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1479 \begin_layout Standard
1480 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1481 \begin_inset space \space{}
1485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1493 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1495 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1500 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1507 \begin_layout Standard
1511 arg "inset-select-all"
1514 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1515 When the cursor is inside an inset
1518 arg "inset-select-all"
1521 selects the content of the inset.
1525 arg "inset-select-all"
1528 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1533 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1536 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1540 \begin_layout Section
1542 \begin_inset Index idx
1545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1552 \begin_inset Index idx
1555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1562 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1564 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1571 \begin_layout Standard
1572 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1574 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1577 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1580 or the toolbar button
1586 to undo some mistake.
1587 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1589 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1592 or the toolbar button
1599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1606 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1610 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1613 \begin_layout Standard
1614 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1623 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1624 This is a consequence of the 100
1625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1628 step undo limit mentioned above.
1631 \begin_layout Standard
1640 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1642 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1646 \begin_layout Section
1648 \begin_inset Index idx
1651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1660 \begin_layout Standard
1661 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1664 \begin_layout Enumerate
1669 \begin_layout Itemize
1674 once anywhere in the edit window.
1675 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1679 \begin_layout Enumerate
1684 \begin_layout Itemize
1691 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1694 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1697 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1698 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1701 \begin_layout Itemize
1702 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1705 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1712 \begin_layout Enumerate
1713 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1717 \begin_layout Standard
1718 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1719 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1723 \begin_layout Section
1725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1727 name "sec:Navigating"
1732 \begin_inset Index idx
1735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1744 \begin_layout Standard
1746 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1749 \begin_layout Itemize
1754 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1755 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1758 \begin_layout Itemize
1759 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1761 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1763 \begin_inset space ~
1768 or by the toolbar button
1771 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1777 \begin_layout Itemize
1778 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1780 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1783 and use the same menu to return to them.
1784 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1787 \begin_layout Standard
1791 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1796 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1797 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1799 \begin_inset space ~
1804 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1805 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1806 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1807 your last editing position.
1810 \begin_layout Standard
1815 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1819 \begin_layout Subsection
1821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1823 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1828 \begin_inset Index idx
1831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1832 Navigating ! Outline
1838 \begin_inset Index idx
1841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1850 \begin_layout Standard
1851 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1852 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1853 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1855 \begin_inset space ~
1859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1861 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1865 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1866 \begin_inset space ~
1870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1872 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1877 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1881 \begin_layout Standard
1882 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1883 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1884 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1885 dialog and to modify the citation.
1888 \begin_layout Standard
1893 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1894 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1896 Labels and References
1898 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1907 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1910 \begin_layout Standard
1911 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1912 you further to control the display.
1917 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1918 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1924 option keeps it in the current view state.
1925 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1926 \begin_inset space ~
1929 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1930 \begin_inset space ~
1933 3, the subsections of sections
1934 \begin_inset space ~
1937 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1942 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1943 \begin_inset space ~
1947 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1957 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1960 \begin_layout Standard
1967 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1968 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1982 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1983 So, for example, you can move section
1984 \begin_inset space ~
1988 \begin_inset space ~
1991 2.4 or after section
1992 \begin_inset space ~
1997 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2010 (or the corresponding key bindings
2018 ) you can change the level of sections.
2019 So you can for example make section
2020 \begin_inset space ~
2024 \begin_inset space ~
2028 \begin_inset space ~
2034 \begin_layout Standard
2035 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2036 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2039 \begin_layout Subsection
2040 Horizontal Scrolling
2041 \begin_inset Index idx
2044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2045 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2053 \begin_layout Standard
2055 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
2057 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2061 \begin_inset space \space{}
2065 \begin_inset space ~
2068 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
2069 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
2070 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2074 \begin_layout Standard
2075 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2079 \begin_layout Itemize
2081 is used on a small tablet computer
2084 \begin_layout Itemize
2085 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2097 \begin_inset space ~
2110 \begin_layout Itemize
2111 Math constructs with long command names
2114 \begin_layout Standard
2115 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2116 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2118 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2119 windows so that table
2120 \begin_inset space ~
2124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2126 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2131 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2133 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2134 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2137 \begin_layout Standard
2138 \begin_inset Float table
2145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2149 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2151 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2155 Horizontal scrolling test.
2163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_inset Tabular
2166 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2167 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2168 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2169 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2170 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2212 \begin_layout Section
2213 Input/Word Completion
2214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2216 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2221 \begin_inset Index idx
2224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2231 \begin_inset Index idx
2234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2265 \begin_layout Standard
2267 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2269 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2270 is used to propose completions.
2273 \begin_layout Standard
2274 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2277 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2282 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2289 \begin_inset space ~
2293 \begin_inset space ~
2298 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2302 \begin_inset space ~
2307 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2308 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2312 \begin_inset space ~
2318 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2319 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2320 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2321 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2324 \begin_layout Standard
2326 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2327 completions available.
2332 key to accept a proposed completion.
2333 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2334 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2335 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2342 \begin_layout Standard
2343 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2344 ing options for text.
2346 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2348 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2350 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2353 he special math option
2357 enables characters to be composed.
2358 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2359 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2362 , you can then input the characters
2363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2374 to a formula to get it.
2375 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2376 of the math toolbar.
2377 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2381 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2382 's installation folder.
2384 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2385 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2392 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2397 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2398 In the example above,
2403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2435 \begin_layout Section
2437 \begin_inset Index idx
2440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2447 \begin_inset Index idx
2450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2479 \begin_inset Index idx
2482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2513 \begin_layout Standard
2514 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2528 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2531 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2535 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2536 \begin_inset space ~
2540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2542 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2549 \begin_layout Standard
2553 \begin_inset space ~
2561 \begin_inset space ~
2582 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2586 \begin_layout Labeling
2587 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2591 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2592 LatexCommand nomenclature
2594 description "Tabulator key"
2601 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2603 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2604 \begin_inset space ~
2608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2610 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2617 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2621 , especially section
2622 \begin_inset space ~
2626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2628 reference "subsec:Lists"
2634 If you are still confused, look in the
2639 \begin_inset Newline newline
2647 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2648 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2652 \begin_layout Labeling
2653 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2657 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2658 LatexCommand nomenclature
2660 description "Escape key"
2668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2675 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2676 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2679 \begin_layout Labeling
2680 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2686 \begin_inset space ~
2690 \begin_inset space ~
2697 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2698 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2702 \begin_layout Standard
2703 There are three modifier keys:
2706 \begin_layout Labeling
2707 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2725 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2726 LatexCommand nomenclature
2728 description "Control key"
2733 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2734 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2738 \begin_layout Itemize
2747 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2750 \begin_layout Itemize
2759 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2762 \begin_layout Itemize
2771 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2775 \begin_layout Labeling
2776 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2794 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2795 LatexCommand nomenclature
2797 description "Shift key"
2802 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2803 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2806 \begin_layout Labeling
2807 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2825 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2826 LatexCommand nomenclature
2828 description "Alt or Meta key"
2833 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2834 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2835 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2841 \begin_inset Newline newline
2844 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2846 menu accelerator keys
2849 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2850 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2854 \begin_layout Standard
2855 For example, the sequence
2856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2862 \begin_inset space ~
2866 \begin_inset space ~
2872 \begin_inset space ~
2880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2899 \begin_inset space ~
2905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2915 \begin_layout Standard
2920 manual lists all other things bound to the
2928 \begin_layout Standard
2929 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2931 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2932 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2933 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2934 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2935 The \SpecialChar LyX
2936 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2937 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2938 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2940 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2956 followed by a capital
2963 \begin_layout Chapter
2966 \begin_inset Index idx
2969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2979 \begin_layout Section
2981 \begin_inset Index idx
2984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2993 \begin_layout Subsection
2997 \begin_layout Standard
2998 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2999 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3000 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3001 numbering schemes, and so on.
3002 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3003 and format the title of your document differently.
3006 \begin_layout Standard
3011 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3012 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3013 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3014 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3015 picks one for you by default.
3016 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3019 \begin_layout Subsection
3021 \begin_inset Index idx
3024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3031 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3033 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3040 \begin_layout Standard
3041 You can select a class using the
3043 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3044 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3048 \begin_inset Index idx
3051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3058 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3062 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3066 \begin_layout Standard
3067 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3072 \begin_layout Description
3073 Article for basic articles
3076 \begin_layout Description
3077 Report for basic reports
3080 \begin_layout Description
3081 Book for writing a book
3084 \begin_layout Description
3085 Letter for US-style letters
3088 \begin_layout Standard
3089 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3090 only uses if you have installed
3091 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3092 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3093 distributions will include
3095 Here are some of the classes.
3096 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3098 Special Document Classes
3107 \begin_layout Description
3108 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3111 \begin_layout Description
3112 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3116 \begin_layout Description
3117 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3121 \begin_layout Description
3122 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3123 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3124 There are three article layouts available.
3125 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3126 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3127 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3128 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3133 sequential numbering
3134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3137 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3138 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3139 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3140 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3143 \begin_layout Description
3144 Beamer Layout for presentations
3147 \begin_layout Description
3148 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3149 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3150 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3151 with \SpecialChar LyX
3155 \begin_layout Description
3156 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3159 \begin_layout Description
3161 \begin_inset space ~
3164 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3167 \begin_layout Description
3168 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3171 \begin_layout Description
3172 Foils Used to make transparencies
3175 \begin_layout Description
3176 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3177 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3178 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3179 with \SpecialChar LyX
3183 \begin_layout Description
3184 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3185 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3188 \begin_layout Description
3189 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3192 \begin_layout Description
3193 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3196 \begin_layout Description
3197 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3198 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3199 (Is used by this document.)
3202 \begin_layout Description
3203 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3206 \begin_layout Description
3207 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3210 \begin_layout Description
3215 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3216 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3218 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3222 \begin_layout Description
3223 Slides Used to make transparencies
3226 \begin_layout Description
3228 \begin_inset space ~
3231 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3232 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3235 \begin_layout Description
3236 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3239 \begin_layout Standard
3240 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3242 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3244 Special Document Classes
3251 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3252 of the document classes.
3255 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3259 \begin_layout Standard
3260 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3262 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3263 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3265 \begin_inset Index idx
3268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3285 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3286 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3288 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3291 \begin_layout Standard
3294 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3299 , are highly specialized.
3301 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3302 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3303 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3304 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3305 by some document class.
3306 There are just too many of them.
3307 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3310 \begin_layout Standard
3311 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3319 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3320 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3321 document class for a new file.
3323 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3326 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3333 manual for information on how to install them.
3334 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3340 \begin_layout Standard
3341 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3342 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3343 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3344 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3345 class files to be used for dissertation
3346 s submitted to those universities.
3347 The \SpecialChar LyX
3348 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3350 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3354 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3360 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3363 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3365 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3367 name "subsec:Modules"
3372 \begin_inset Index idx
3375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3384 \begin_layout Standard
3385 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3386 chosen document class.
3387 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3388 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3395 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3399 \begin_inset Index idx
3402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3409 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3413 \begin_layout Standard
3414 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3415 packages or file format converters that are not always
3416 installed by default.
3418 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3419 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3420 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3421 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3423 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3424 file without the missing prerequisites.
3425 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3426 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3429 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3433 \begin_inset Index idx
3436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3437 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3443 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3448 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3451 \begin_layout Standard
3452 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3460 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3462 will advise you about these things.
3470 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3472 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3474 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3479 \begin_inset Index idx
3482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3483 Document ! Local Layout
3491 \begin_layout Standard
3492 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3493 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3494 : They are intended to be used in
3495 a variety of different documents.
3496 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3497 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3498 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3499 need a specific inset or
3500 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3502 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3505 style only that one time.
3506 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3508 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3526 manual for information on how to use it.
3529 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3533 \begin_layout Standard
3534 Each class has a default set of options.
3535 Here's a quick table describing them:
3538 \begin_layout Standard
3539 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3545 \begin_layout Standard
3547 \begin_inset Tabular
3548 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3549 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3550 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3551 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3552 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3553 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3554 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4008 \begin_layout Standard
4009 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4015 \begin_layout Standard
4016 You're probably also wondering what
4017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4021 \begin_inset space ~
4025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4029 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4030 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4035 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4040 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4050 headings, there are also
4058 headings, and so on.
4059 We will describe these headings fully in section
4060 \begin_inset space ~
4064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4066 reference "subsec:Headings"
4073 \begin_layout Subsection
4075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4077 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4082 \begin_inset Index idx
4085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4092 \begin_inset Index idx
4095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4104 \begin_layout Standard
4105 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4107 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4114 \begin_inset space ~
4122 \begin_inset space ~
4127 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4129 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4130 doesn't support special options you want to
4131 use for your document.
4132 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4133 -class and its options, you have to read
4137 \begin_layout Standard
4141 \begin_inset space ~
4148 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4154 \begin_inset space ~
4159 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4160 You can choose between the following five options:
4163 \begin_layout Labeling
4164 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4169 Use default page style of current class.
4172 \begin_layout Labeling
4173 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4178 No page numbers or headings.
4181 \begin_layout Labeling
4182 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4190 \begin_layout Labeling
4191 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4196 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4197 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4198 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4199 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4202 \begin_layout Labeling
4203 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4208 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4209 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4215 \begin_inset Index idx
4218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4226 How they are defined is explained in section
4227 \begin_inset space ~
4231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4233 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4240 \begin_layout Standard
4241 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4242 \begin_inset space ~
4246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4248 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4255 \begin_layout Subsection
4256 Paper Size and Orientation
4257 \begin_inset Index idx
4260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4261 Document ! Paper size
4267 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4269 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4276 \begin_layout Standard
4277 You can find the following options in the menu
4280 \begin_inset space ~
4287 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4291 \begin_inset Index idx
4294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4303 \begin_layout Labeling
4304 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4308 \begin_inset space ~
4313 What size paper to print on.
4318 \begin_layout Itemize
4324 \begin_layout Itemize
4330 \begin_layout Itemize
4336 \begin_layout Itemize
4342 \begin_layout Itemize
4345 US letter, US legal, US executive
4348 \begin_layout Itemize
4354 \begin_layout Itemize
4361 \begin_layout Labeling
4362 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4367 To choose whether to output as
4378 \begin_layout Labeling
4379 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4383 \begin_inset space ~
4388 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4389 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4392 \begin_layout Subsection
4394 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4396 name "subsec:Margins"
4401 \begin_inset Index idx
4404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4411 \begin_inset Index idx
4414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4423 \begin_layout Standard
4424 Paper margins are set in the menu
4426 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4430 \begin_inset Index idx
4433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4442 \begin_layout Standard
4443 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4444 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4445 the paper format and the font size into account.
4448 \begin_layout Subsection
4452 \begin_layout Standard
4453 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4459 That includes the paragraph environments.
4460 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4461 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4462 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4464 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4473 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4475 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4476 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4477 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4480 \begin_layout Section
4481 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4482 \begin_inset Index idx
4485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4486 Paragraph ! Indentation
4494 \begin_layout Subsection
4496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4498 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4505 \begin_layout Standard
4506 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4507 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4510 \begin_layout Standard
4511 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4512 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4513 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4514 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4518 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4524 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4525 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4526 language than English.
4528 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4531 \begin_layout Standard
4532 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4533 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4534 into \SpecialChar LyX
4536 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4539 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4541 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4542 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4543 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4550 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4551 goes to produce a printable file.
4556 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4558 gives you the ability globally to change
4562 these pre-coded spacings.
4563 We will explain more later.
4566 \begin_layout Subsection
4567 Paragraph Separation
4568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4570 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4575 \begin_inset Index idx
4578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4579 Paragraph ! Separation
4587 \begin_layout Standard
4595 \begin_inset space ~
4603 \begin_inset space ~
4610 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4614 \begin_inset Index idx
4617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4623 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4626 \begin_layout Subsection
4630 \begin_layout Standard
4631 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4634 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4636 \begin_inset space ~
4641 dialog and toggle the
4644 \begin_inset space ~
4649 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4652 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4656 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4657 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4661 \begin_layout Standard
4662 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4663 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4666 \begin_layout Subsection
4668 \begin_inset Index idx
4671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4672 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4680 \begin_layout Standard
4683 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4687 \begin_inset Index idx
4690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4699 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4703 \begin_inset space ~
4712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4713 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4719 \begin_inset Index idx
4722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4729 installed to use this feature.
4734 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4736 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4738 \begin_inset space ~
4743 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4744 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4747 \begin_layout Section
4748 Paragraph Environments
4749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4751 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4756 \begin_inset Index idx
4759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4760 Paragraph ! Environments
4766 \begin_inset Index idx
4769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4770 Paragraph environments|(
4778 \begin_layout Subsection
4782 \begin_layout Standard
4783 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4786 \begin_layout Standard
4795 } \SpecialChar ldots
4805 \begin_inset Newline newline
4808 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4810 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4811 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4812 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4821 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4824 \begin_layout Standard
4825 A paragraph environment is simply a
4826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4833 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4834 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4835 scheme, labels, and so on.
4836 Additionally, you can
4837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4844 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4845 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4846 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4847 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4849 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4851 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4854 \begin_layout Standard
4855 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4856 \begin_inset Graphics
4857 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4863 at the left end of the toolbar.
4865 will change the environment of the
4869 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4870 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4871 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4875 \begin_layout Standard
4884 create a new paragraph using the
4888 paragraph environment.
4890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4897 because if you are in one of these environments:
4900 \begin_layout Itemize
4906 \begin_layout Itemize
4912 \begin_layout Itemize
4918 \begin_layout Itemize
4924 \begin_layout Itemize
4930 \begin_layout Itemize
4936 \begin_layout Itemize
4942 \begin_layout Standard
4944 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4948 , rather than resetting it to
4953 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4954 \begin_inset space ~
4958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4960 reference "sec:Nesting"
4967 \begin_layout Subsection
4971 \begin_layout Standard
4972 The default paragraph environment is
4977 It creates a plain paragraph.
4979 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4980 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4981 this manual) are in the
4988 \begin_layout Standard
4989 You can nest a paragraph using the
4993 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5001 \begin_layout Subsection
5003 \begin_inset Index idx
5006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5017 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5026 for thanks or contact information.
5027 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5028 places all of this on a separate page
5029 along with today's date.
5030 For other types of documents, the title
5031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5038 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5042 \begin_layout Standard
5044 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5058 Here's how you use them:
5061 \begin_layout Itemize
5062 Put the title of your document in the
5069 \begin_layout Itemize
5070 Put the author name in the
5077 \begin_layout Itemize
5078 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5079 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5085 Note that using this environment is optional.
5086 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5087 will automatically insert today's date.
5088 If you don't want a date, use the option
5090 Suppress default date on front page
5094 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5095 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5097 \begin_inset space ~
5105 \begin_layout Standard
5106 You can use footnotes to insert
5107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5114 or contact information.
5117 \begin_layout Subsection
5119 \begin_inset Index idx
5122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5131 name "subsec:Headings"
5138 \begin_layout Standard
5139 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5141 takes care of the numbering for you.
5144 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5146 \begin_inset Index idx
5149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5150 Section headings ! Numbered
5158 \begin_layout Standard
5159 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5163 \begin_layout Enumerate
5169 \begin_layout Enumerate
5175 \begin_layout Enumerate
5181 \begin_layout Enumerate
5187 \begin_layout Enumerate
5193 \begin_layout Enumerate
5199 \begin_layout Enumerate
5205 \begin_layout Standard
5207 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5208 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5209 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5212 \begin_layout Standard
5213 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5214 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5215 You group the book into chapters.
5217 does a similar grouping:
5220 \begin_layout Itemize
5225 is divided into either
5236 \begin_layout Itemize
5248 \begin_layout Itemize
5260 \begin_layout Itemize
5272 \begin_layout Itemize
5284 \begin_layout Itemize
5296 \begin_layout Standard
5297 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5305 Not all document types use the
5309 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5314 is the top-level heading.
5322 \begin_layout Standard
5327 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5328 labels it with its number,
5329 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5331 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5343 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5345 \begin_inset Index idx
5348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5349 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5357 \begin_layout Standard
5358 The unnumbered section headings have a
5359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5366 at the end of their name.
5367 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5368 the table of contents, see section
5369 \begin_inset space ~
5373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5382 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5383 Changing the Numbering
5384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5386 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5393 \begin_layout Standard
5394 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5395 in the Table of Contents.
5396 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5398 Just as certain classes start with
5412 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5422 This is something you can change.
5425 \begin_layout Standard
5428 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5432 \begin_inset Index idx
5435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5444 \begin_inset space ~
5448 \begin_inset space ~
5453 you will see two counters.
5458 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5459 numbers a section heading.
5460 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5464 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5465 Short Titles of Headings
5466 \begin_inset Index idx
5469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5470 Section headings ! Short titles
5476 \begin_inset Argument 1
5479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5488 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5495 \begin_layout Standard
5496 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5497 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5498 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5499 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5502 \begin_layout Standard
5504 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5505 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5506 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5507 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5510 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5512 \begin_inset space ~
5518 This will insert a box labeled
5519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5523 \begin_inset space ~
5527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5530 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5531 This also works for captions inside floats.
5532 There can only be one short title per title.
5535 \begin_layout Standard
5536 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5539 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5543 \begin_layout Standard
5544 The following information applies to all section headings:
5547 \begin_layout Itemize
5548 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5551 \begin_layout Itemize
5552 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5555 \begin_layout Itemize
5556 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5559 \begin_layout Itemize
5560 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5563 \begin_layout Subsection
5567 \begin_layout Standard
5569 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5583 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5584 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5585 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5586 the text they contain.
5587 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5595 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5598 \begin_layout Standard
5599 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5608 when you start a new paragraph.
5609 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5613 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5614 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5615 have to change back to the
5619 environment yourself.
5622 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5631 \begin_inset Index idx
5634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5643 \begin_layout Standard
5644 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5645 time for the differences.
5654 are identical except for one difference:
5658 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5667 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5670 \begin_layout Standard
5671 Here's an example of the
5684 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5686 See – no indentation!
5690 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5691 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5692 the other paragraph.
5695 \begin_layout Standard
5696 Here's another example, this time in the
5703 \begin_layout Quotation
5709 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5710 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5711 the first line, then
5715 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5719 you were quoting other text.
5722 \begin_layout Quotation
5723 Here's a new paragraph.
5724 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5725 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5728 \begin_layout Standard
5729 As the examples show,
5733 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5734 They should put quotes in the
5739 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5743 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5746 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5748 \begin_inset Index idx
5751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5758 \begin_inset Index idx
5761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5777 \begin_layout Standard
5782 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5788 \begin_inset Newline newline
5791 Which I did not rehearse!
5795 It could be much worse.
5796 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5798 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5799 indented a bit more than the first.
5800 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5806 \begin_inset Newline newline
5809 And make things look fine
5810 \begin_inset Newline newline
5816 arg "newline-insert newline"
5822 \begin_layout Standard
5827 does not indent both margins.
5828 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5829 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5832 arg "newline-insert newline"
5838 \begin_layout Subsection
5840 \begin_inset Index idx
5843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5859 \begin_layout Standard
5861 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5871 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5872 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5881 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5882 lets you provide your own label.
5883 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5884 describing some general features of all four of them.
5887 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5891 \begin_layout Standard
5892 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5894 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5895 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5904 reset the environment to
5908 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5909 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5910 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5914 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5918 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5925 \begin_layout Standard
5926 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5927 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5928 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5930 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5931 you read all of section
5932 \begin_inset space ~
5936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5938 reference "sec:Nesting"
5945 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5947 \begin_inset Index idx
5950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5966 \begin_layout Standard
5967 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5971 paragraph environment.
5972 It has the following properties:
5975 \begin_layout Itemize
5976 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5980 \begin_layout Itemize
5982 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5985 \begin_layout Itemize
5986 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5990 \begin_layout Itemize
5991 The items can have any length.
5993 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5994 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6001 \begin_layout Itemize
6006 environment inside another
6010 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6014 \begin_layout Itemize
6015 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6018 \begin_layout Itemize
6020 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6023 \begin_layout Itemize
6025 \begin_inset space ~
6029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6031 reference "sec:Nesting"
6035 for a full explanation of nesting.
6039 \begin_layout Standard
6040 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6049 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6052 \begin_layout Standard
6053 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6054 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6057 \begin_layout Itemize
6058 The label for the first level
6062 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6066 \begin_layout Itemize
6067 The label for the second level is a dash.
6071 \begin_layout Itemize
6072 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6076 \begin_layout Itemize
6077 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6081 \begin_layout Itemize
6082 Back out to the third level.
6086 \begin_layout Itemize
6087 Back to the second level.
6091 \begin_layout Itemize
6092 Back to the outermost level.
6095 \begin_layout Standard
6096 These are the default labels for an
6101 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6103 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6106 dialog in the submenu
6111 \begin_inset Index idx
6114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6120 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6124 \begin_layout Standard
6125 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6126 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6128 \begin_inset space ~
6132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6134 reference "sec:Nesting"
6141 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6143 \begin_inset Index idx
6146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6153 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6155 name "sec:Enumerate"
6162 \begin_layout Standard
6167 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6168 It has these properties:
6171 \begin_layout Enumerate
6172 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6176 \begin_layout Enumerate
6177 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6181 \begin_layout Enumerate
6183 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6186 \begin_layout Enumerate
6191 environment resets the counter to one.
6194 \begin_layout Enumerate
6207 \begin_layout Enumerate
6208 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6209 Items can have any length.
6212 \begin_layout Enumerate
6213 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6216 \begin_layout Enumerate
6217 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6220 \begin_layout Enumerate
6221 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6225 \begin_layout Standard
6234 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6236 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6237 labels the four different levels in an
6244 \begin_layout Enumerate
6245 The first level of an
6249 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6253 \begin_layout Enumerate
6254 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6258 \begin_layout Enumerate
6259 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6263 \begin_layout Enumerate
6264 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6267 \begin_layout Enumerate
6268 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6273 \begin_layout Enumerate
6274 Back to the third level
6278 \begin_layout Enumerate
6279 Back to the second level.
6283 \begin_layout Enumerate
6284 Back to the outermost level.
6287 \begin_layout Standard
6288 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6292 environment, see section
6293 \begin_inset space ~
6297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6299 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6304 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6308 \begin_layout Standard
6309 There is more to nesting
6313 environments than we've stated here.
6314 You should read section
6315 \begin_inset space ~
6319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6321 reference "sec:Nesting"
6325 to learn more about nesting.
6328 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6330 \begin_inset Index idx
6333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6342 \begin_layout Standard
6343 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6347 list has no fixed label.
6348 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6357 of the first line as the label.
6361 \begin_layout Description
6362 Example: This is an example of the
6369 \begin_layout Standard
6371 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6375 \begin_layout Standard
6377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6384 it is meant that the first usage of the
6388 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6390 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6398 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6403 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6404 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6406 \begin_inset space ~
6412 \begin_inset space ~
6416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6418 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6422 for more information.) Here is an example:
6425 \begin_layout Description
6427 \begin_inset space ~
6430 Example: This one shows how to use a
6433 \begin_inset space ~
6445 \begin_layout Description
6446 Usage: You should use the
6450 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6451 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6453 It's not a good idea to use a
6457 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6458 You're better off using
6470 paragraphs into them.
6473 \begin_layout Description
6474 Nesting: You can nest
6478 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6482 \begin_layout Standard
6483 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6484 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6485 them from the first line.
6488 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6490 \begin_inset Index idx
6493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6502 \begin_layout Standard
6507 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6508 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6512 \begin_layout Standard
6521 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6523 Here are its properties:
6526 \begin_layout Labeling
6527 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6529 \begin_inset space ~
6532 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6541 of each line as the item label.
6546 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6547 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6548 space as described above.
6551 \begin_layout Labeling
6552 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6553 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6554 uses different margins for the item label and the
6555 body of the item text.
6556 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6557 label width plus a little extra space.
6561 \begin_layout Labeling
6562 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6564 \begin_inset space ~
6567 width \SpecialChar LyX
6568 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6569 If the label width is larger, the label
6570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6577 into the first line.
6578 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6579 margin of the rest of the item text.
6582 \begin_layout Labeling
6583 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6585 \begin_inset space ~
6588 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6593 environment has the same left margin.
6594 \begin_inset Newline newline
6597 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6600 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6602 \begin_inset space ~
6607 dialog (toolbar button
6610 arg "layout-paragraph"
6617 \begin_inset space ~
6622 determines the default label width.
6623 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6632 multiple times instead.
6633 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6643 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6646 \begin_inset space ~
6651 every time you alter a label in a
6656 \begin_inset Newline newline
6659 The predefined default width is the length of
6660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6668 \begin_inset space ~
6674 \begin_layout Standard
6679 list the same way as the
6683 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6689 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6693 \begin_layout Standard
6698 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6699 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6701 \begin_inset space ~
6705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6707 reference "sec:Nesting"
6711 to learn about nesting.
6714 \begin_layout Standard
6715 There is yet another feature of the
6719 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6720 left-justifies the item labels by
6722 You can use additional
6726 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6727 justifies the item label.
6732 are documented in section
6733 \begin_inset space ~
6737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6739 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6744 Here are some examples:
6747 \begin_layout Labeling
6748 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6749 Left The default for
6756 \begin_layout Labeling
6757 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6758 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6765 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6768 \begin_layout Labeling
6769 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6770 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6774 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6781 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6784 \begin_layout Subsection
6786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6788 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6793 \begin_inset Index idx
6796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6805 \begin_layout Standard
6806 The features described in this section require that the module
6808 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6810 is loaded in the document settings.
6811 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6817 \begin_inset Index idx
6820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6830 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6831 Custom Enumerate Lists
6832 \begin_inset Index idx
6835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6836 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6844 \begin_layout Standard
6846 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6849 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6852 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6853 There you add the command
6856 \begin_layout Standard
6864 \begin_layout Standard
6876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6877 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6878 Code, look at section
6879 \begin_inset space ~
6883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6885 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6898 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6905 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6906 For capital Roman numerals replace
6918 in the command above.
6919 For Arabic numerals use
6927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6934 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6949 \begin_layout Standard
6951 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6959 You can only number 26
6960 \begin_inset space ~
6963 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6971 \begin_layout Standard
6972 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6973 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6976 \begin_layout Standard
6977 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6980 \begin_layout Enumerate
6981 \begin_inset Argument 1
6984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7010 \begin_layout Enumerate
7011 \begin_inset Argument 1
7014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7037 \begin_layout Enumerate
7042 \begin_layout Enumerate
7043 \begin_inset Argument 1
7046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7070 \begin_layout Enumerate
7071 \begin_inset Argument 1
7074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7100 \begin_layout Standard
7101 For this list these commands were used:
7104 \begin_layout Standard
7115 \begin_inset Newline newline
7123 \begin_inset Newline newline
7131 \begin_inset Newline newline
7141 \begin_layout Standard
7148 makes the label emphasized and
7157 \begin_layout Standard
7158 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7166 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7167 lists until you change the definition.
7175 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7177 \begin_inset Index idx
7180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7181 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7189 \begin_layout Standard
7190 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7193 \begin_layout Enumerate
7194 \begin_inset Argument 1
7197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7216 \begin_inset Note Note
7219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7220 goes back to default numbering
7228 \begin_layout Enumerate
7232 \begin_layout Standard
7236 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7240 \begin_layout Standard
7241 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7246 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7247 to indicate that it is a resumed
7248 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7249 , but in the output.
7252 \begin_layout Standard
7253 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7261 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7270 \begin_layout Standard
7271 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7273 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7274 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7275 of a normal enumeration.
7276 There, insert the command
7279 \begin_layout Standard
7285 \begin_layout Standard
7290 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7294 \begin_layout Enumerate
7298 \begin_layout Enumerate
7302 \begin_layout Standard
7303 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7306 \begin_layout Enumerate
7307 \begin_inset Argument 1
7310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7326 This enumeration starts at 4
7329 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7331 \begin_inset Index idx
7334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7343 \begin_layout Standard
7344 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7346 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7349 \begin_layout Itemize
7353 \begin_layout Itemize
7354 with standard spacing
7357 \begin_layout Standard
7358 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7360 Add there the command
7364 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7367 \begin_layout Itemize
7368 \begin_inset Argument 1
7371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7390 \begin_layout Itemize
7394 \begin_layout Itemize
7398 \begin_layout Standard
7399 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7406 \begin_inset Index idx
7409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7417 For more information see its documentation,
7418 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7428 \begin_layout Standard
7429 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7431 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7432 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7433 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7436 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7439 \begin_layout Enumerate
7440 \begin_inset Argument 1
7443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7451 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7464 \begin_layout Enumerate
7465 with negative indentation
7468 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7469 Further Customization
7470 \begin_inset Index idx
7473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7474 Lists ! Customization
7482 \begin_layout Standard
7483 You can also change the style of description lists.
7487 \begin_layout Standard
7493 \begin_layout Standard
7494 changes the description label font, the command
7497 \begin_layout Standard
7503 \begin_layout Standard
7504 sets the list style.
7507 \begin_layout Standard
7508 An example where the command
7511 \begin_layout Standard
7516 itshape, style=nextline
7519 \begin_layout Standard
7523 \begin_layout Description
7525 \begin_inset space ~
7529 \begin_inset Argument 1
7532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7538 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7540 itshape, style=nextline
7550 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7551 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7555 \begin_layout Description
7557 \begin_inset space ~
7560 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7561 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7562 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7565 \begin_layout Standard
7566 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7572 \begin_inset Index idx
7575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7583 For more information see its documentation
7584 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7594 \begin_layout Subsection
7596 \begin_inset Index idx
7599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7608 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7610 \begin_inset space ~
7613 Address: An Overview
7616 \begin_layout Standard
7617 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7618 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7626 \begin_inset space ~
7632 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7633 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7634 gags on the document.
7635 In contrast, you can use the
7642 \begin_inset space ~
7647 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7648 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7652 \begin_layout Standard
7653 Of course, you're not limited to using
7660 \begin_inset space ~
7669 \begin_inset space ~
7674 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7675 some European academic papers.
7678 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7682 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7689 \begin_layout Standard
7694 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7695 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7699 \begin_inset space ~
7704 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7705 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7706 Here's an example of each:
7709 \begin_layout Right Address
7711 \begin_inset Newline newline
7715 \begin_inset Newline newline
7719 \begin_inset Newline newline
7722 When is it? What is today?
7725 \begin_layout Standard
7729 \begin_inset space ~
7735 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7737 the largest block of text on a single line.
7738 Here's an example of the
7745 \begin_layout Address
7747 \begin_inset Newline newline
7750 Where do I send this
7751 \begin_inset Newline newline
7754 Your post office and country
7757 \begin_layout Standard
7758 As you can see, both
7765 \begin_inset space ~
7770 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7775 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7776 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7782 This makes sense, since
7790 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7791 Thus, you have to use
7798 arg "newline-insert newline"
7803 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7804 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7806 \begin_inset space ~
7810 \begin_inset space ~
7815 ) to start a new line in an
7822 \begin_inset space ~
7830 \begin_layout Subsection
7834 \begin_layout Standard
7835 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7836 or list of references.
7838 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7841 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7843 \begin_inset Index idx
7846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7855 \begin_layout Standard
7860 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7861 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7862 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7863 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7877 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7878 The book document classes ignores the
7882 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7886 in a letter document class.
7889 \begin_layout Standard
7894 environment does several things for you.
7895 First, it puts the centered label
7896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7904 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7906 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7907 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7908 the subsequent text.
7909 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7911 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7915 \begin_layout Standard
7916 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7920 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7921 The new paragraph will still be in the
7926 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7927 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7930 \begin_layout Standard
7931 \begin_inset Float figure
7938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7940 \begin_inset Graphics
7941 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7949 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7954 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7975 \begin_layout Standard
7976 We would love to demonstrate the
7980 environment, but since this document is in the
7981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7988 class, we can't do this.
7989 We inserted it therefore as figure
7990 \begin_inset space ~
7994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7996 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8001 If you have never heard of an
8002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8009 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8012 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8014 \begin_inset Index idx
8017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8026 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8033 \begin_layout Standard
8038 environment is used to list references.
8039 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8040 only use it at the end of the document.
8052 \begin_layout Standard
8053 When you first open a
8057 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8058 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8074 depending on the document class.
8075 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8076 Each paragraph of the
8080 environment is a bibliography entry.
8085 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8086 Each new paragraph is still in the
8093 \begin_layout Standard
8094 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8095 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8097 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8099 handling, have a look at section
8100 \begin_inset space ~
8104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8106 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8113 \begin_layout Subsection
8114 Special Environments
8117 \begin_layout Standard
8119 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8120 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8123 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8128 \begin_inset Index idx
8131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8141 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8148 \begin_layout Standard
8154 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8156 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8161 key as a fixed whitespace.
8165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8178 \begin_inset space ~
8183 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8201 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8204 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8207 arg "newline-insert newline"
8224 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8225 So, when you finish using the
8230 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8231 Also, you can nest the
8236 environment inside of others.
8239 \begin_layout Standard
8240 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8243 \begin_layout Itemize
8247 arg "newline-insert newline"
8250 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8255 \begin_inset space \space{}
8265 arg "newline-insert newline"
8271 \begin_layout Itemize
8275 arg "newline-insert newline"
8285 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8291 \begin_layout Itemize
8292 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8293 You must put at least one
8297 in any line you want blank.
8298 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8302 \begin_layout Itemize
8303 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8307 since that will insert
8312 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8315 arg "self-insert \""
8321 \begin_layout Standard
8325 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8329 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8333 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8337 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8341 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8342 printf("Hello World!
8347 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8351 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8355 \begin_layout Standard
8356 This is just the standard
8357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8368 \begin_layout Standard
8374 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8376 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8377 as if you used a typewriter.
8378 \begin_inset Index idx
8381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8382 Paragraph environments|)
8387 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8390 Program Code Listings
8395 \begin_inset space ~
8403 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8407 \begin_inset Index idx
8410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8419 \begin_layout Standard
8424 environment is similar to the
8429 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8430 computer console text.
8435 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8449 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8450 you can have empty lines.
8463 \begin_layout Itemize
8464 have a certain language and a text style
8467 \begin_layout Itemize
8468 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8469 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8470 and \SpecialChar TeX
8474 \begin_layout Standard
8475 Because of these properties
8479 works like a typewriter.
8483 \begin_layout Verbatim
8488 \begin_layout Verbatim
8492 The following 2 lines are empty:
8495 \begin_layout Verbatim
8499 \begin_layout Verbatim
8503 \begin_layout Verbatim
8505 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8510 \begin_layout Standard
8515 environment is identical to
8519 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8520 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8527 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8532 \begin_layout Section
8533 Nesting Environments
8534 \begin_inset Index idx
8537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8538 Nesting ! Environments
8544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8553 \begin_layout Subsection
8557 \begin_layout Standard
8559 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8561 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8563 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8565 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8577 \begin_layout Enumerate
8581 \begin_layout Enumerate
8586 \begin_layout Enumerate
8590 \begin_layout Enumerate
8595 \begin_layout Enumerate
8599 \begin_layout Standard
8600 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8601 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8603 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8605 \begin_inset space ~
8609 \begin_inset space ~
8617 \begin_inset space ~
8621 \begin_inset space ~
8626 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8628 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8631 arg "depth-increment"
8637 arg "depth-decrement"
8651 arg "depth-increment"
8657 arg "depth-decrement"
8661 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8662 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8666 \begin_layout Standard
8667 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8668 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8669 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8670 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8671 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8674 \begin_layout Standard
8675 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8677 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8679 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8682 \begin_layout Subsection
8683 What You Can and Can't Nest
8686 \begin_layout Standard
8687 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8688 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8691 \begin_layout Standard
8692 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8693 than a simple yes or no.
8694 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8697 \begin_layout Itemize
8698 Completely unnestable
8701 \begin_layout Itemize
8702 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8706 \begin_layout Itemize
8707 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8711 \begin_layout Standard
8712 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8713 environments have them:
8716 \begin_layout Description
8717 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8718 Can't nest into them.
8722 \begin_layout Itemize
8728 \begin_layout Itemize
8734 \begin_layout Itemize
8740 \begin_layout Itemize
8746 \begin_layout Itemize
8753 \begin_layout Description
8755 \begin_inset space ~
8758 Nestable You can nest them.
8759 You can nest other things into them.
8763 \begin_layout Itemize
8769 \begin_layout Itemize
8775 \begin_layout Itemize
8781 \begin_layout Itemize
8787 \begin_layout Itemize
8793 \begin_layout Itemize
8799 \begin_layout Itemize
8805 \begin_layout Itemize
8812 \begin_layout Itemize
8818 \begin_layout Itemize
8825 \begin_layout Description
8826 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8827 You can't nest anything into them.
8831 \begin_layout Itemize
8837 \begin_layout Itemize
8843 \begin_layout Itemize
8849 \begin_layout Itemize
8855 \begin_layout Itemize
8861 \begin_layout Itemize
8867 \begin_layout Itemize
8873 \begin_layout Itemize
8879 \begin_layout Itemize
8885 \begin_layout Itemize
8891 \begin_layout Itemize
8897 \begin_layout Itemize
8903 \begin_layout Itemize
8909 \begin_layout Itemize
8913 \begin_inset space ~
8919 \begin_layout Itemize
8926 \begin_layout Standard
8927 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8935 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8945 \begin_inset space ~
8948 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8949 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8950 nested section headings violate this.
8958 \begin_layout Subsection
8959 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8960 \begin_inset Index idx
8963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8964 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8972 \begin_layout Standard
8973 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8974 affected by nesting anyhow.
8978 \begin_layout Itemize
8982 \begin_layout Itemize
8986 \begin_layout Itemize
8990 \begin_layout Standard
8992 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9000 Figures and tables in
9004 are not affected by this.
9009 Have a look at section
9010 \begin_inset space ~
9014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9016 reference "sec:Floats"
9020 for more information about
9027 \begin_layout Standard
9029 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9030 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9034 \begin_layout Standard
9035 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9043 of its own, it behaves just like a
9044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9051 paragraph environment.
9052 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9056 \begin_layout Standard
9057 Here's an example with a table:
9060 \begin_layout Enumerate
9065 \begin_layout Enumerate
9066 This is (a) and it's nested.
9070 \begin_layout Standard
9071 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9077 \begin_layout Standard
9079 \begin_inset Tabular
9080 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9081 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9167 \begin_layout Standard
9168 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9175 \begin_layout Enumerate
9177 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9181 \begin_layout Enumerate
9185 \begin_layout Standard
9186 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9189 \begin_layout Enumerate
9194 \begin_layout Enumerate
9195 This is (a) and it's nested.
9199 \begin_layout Standard
9200 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9206 \begin_layout Standard
9208 \begin_inset Tabular
9209 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9210 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9211 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9212 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9296 \begin_layout Standard
9297 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9303 \begin_layout Enumerate
9310 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9313 \begin_layout Enumerate
9317 \begin_layout Standard
9318 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9322 \begin_layout Standard
9323 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9326 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9329 \begin_layout Enumerate
9334 \begin_layout Enumerate
9335 This is (a) and it's nested.
9338 \begin_layout Standard
9339 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9345 \begin_layout Standard
9347 \begin_inset Tabular
9348 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9349 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9350 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9351 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9436 \begin_layout Standard
9437 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9443 \begin_layout Enumerate
9445 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9452 \begin_layout Enumerate
9456 \begin_layout Standard
9457 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9463 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9464 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9468 \begin_layout Subsection
9469 Usage and General Features
9472 \begin_layout Standard
9473 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9474 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9483 is the innermost possible depth.
9484 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9487 \begin_layout Enumerate
9488 level #1 – outermost
9492 \begin_layout Enumerate
9497 \begin_layout Enumerate
9502 \begin_layout Enumerate
9507 \begin_layout Itemize
9512 \begin_layout Itemize
9521 \begin_layout Standard
9522 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9523 both of them in the example.
9524 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9534 For example, if we tried to nest another
9539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9546 , we would get errors.
9549 \begin_layout Subsection
9551 \begin_inset Index idx
9554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9563 \begin_layout Standard
9564 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9565 We have several examples of nested environments.
9566 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9570 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9571 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9574 \begin_layout Labeling
9575 \labelwidthstring MMM
9576 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9585 \begin_layout Labeling
9586 \labelwidthstring MMM
9587 #2-a This is level #2.
9588 We created it by using
9591 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9597 arg "depth-increment"
9604 \begin_layout Labeling
9605 \labelwidthstring MMM
9606 #3-a This is level #3.
9607 This time, we just enter
9614 arg "depth-increment"
9618 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9622 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9628 arg "depth-increment"
9635 \begin_layout Standard
9640 environment, nested inside of
9641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9649 So, it's at level #4.
9650 We did this by entering
9653 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9659 arg "depth-increment"
9662 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9667 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9683 \begin_layout Standard
9688 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9691 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9697 \begin_layout Labeling
9698 \labelwidthstring MMM
9699 #4-a This is level #4.
9703 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9706 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9711 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9715 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9720 keep nesting things inside
9721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9732 \begin_layout Labeling
9733 \labelwidthstring MMM
9734 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9739 \begin_layout Labeling
9740 \labelwidthstring MMM
9741 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9742 and this is level #6.
9743 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9747 \begin_layout Labeling
9748 \labelwidthstring MMM
9749 #5-b Back to level #5.
9753 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9759 arg "depth-decrement"
9766 \begin_layout Labeling
9767 \labelwidthstring MMM
9771 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9777 arg "depth-decrement"
9780 , we're back at level #4.
9784 \begin_layout Labeling
9785 \labelwidthstring MMM
9786 #3-b Back to level #3.
9787 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9791 \begin_layout Labeling
9792 \labelwidthstring MMM
9793 #2-b Back to level #2.
9798 \begin_layout Labeling
9799 \labelwidthstring MMM
9800 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9801 After this sentence, we will enter
9805 and change the paragraph environment back to
9812 \begin_layout Standard
9813 We could have also used the
9829 environment in place of the
9834 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9837 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9838 Example 2: Inheritance
9841 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9842 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9845 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9854 arg "depth-increment"
9858 \begin_inset Newline newline
9861 which, we will change to the
9869 \begin_layout Enumerate
9874 environment, at level #2.
9877 \begin_layout Enumerate
9878 Notice how the nested
9882 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9886 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9890 \begin_layout Standard
9891 We ended this example by entering
9896 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9900 and reset the nesting depth by using
9903 arg "depth-decrement"
9909 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9910 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9919 \begin_inset Argument 1
9922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9923 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9931 \begin_layout Enumerate
9932 This is level #1, in an
9936 paragraph environment.
9937 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9941 \begin_layout Enumerate
9946 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9952 arg "depth-increment"
9956 Now, what happens if we nest an
9960 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9961 label be? An asterisk?
9965 \begin_layout Itemize
9975 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9976 So, its label is a bullet.
9977 (We got here by using
9980 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9986 arg "depth-increment"
9989 , then changing the environment to
9997 \begin_layout Itemize
9998 Here's level #4, produced using
10001 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10007 arg "depth-increment"
10011 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10016 \begin_layout Enumerate
10018 to get to level #5.
10019 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10024 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10028 , because we are in the
10036 environment (that is, it is an
10051 \begin_layout Enumerate
10056 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10057 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10061 \begin_layout Enumerate
10062 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10065 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10068 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10071 \begin_layout Enumerate
10075 arg "depth-decrement"
10078 to decrease the depth after the next
10081 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10088 \begin_layout Enumerate
10090 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10095 \begin_layout Enumerate
10097 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10098 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10102 \begin_layout Enumerate
10103 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10112 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10117 reset the counter for the label.
10121 \begin_layout Enumerate
10125 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10131 arg "depth-decrement"
10134 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10135 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10136 into the twofold-nested
10144 \begin_layout Enumerate
10145 The same thing happens if we do another
10148 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10154 arg "depth-decrement"
10157 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10160 \begin_layout Standard
10161 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10166 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10177 The number of other
10181 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10188 The same rule applies for the
10192 environment, as well.
10195 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10196 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10199 \begin_layout Enumerate
10200 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10201 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10202 the same detail with how we did it.
10211 \begin_layout Standard
10219 arg "depth-increment"
10226 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10227 the example in parentheses someplace.
10228 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10229 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10230 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10234 \begin_layout Enumerate
10239 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10243 \begin_layout Verse
10244 Now we will add verse.
10245 \begin_inset Newline newline
10248 It will get much worse.
10249 \begin_inset Newline newline
10259 arg "depth-increment"
10269 \begin_layout Verse
10270 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10271 \begin_inset Newline newline
10274 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10275 \begin_inset Newline newline
10281 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10289 \begin_layout Verse
10290 Here comes a table:
10294 \begin_layout Standard
10295 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10301 \begin_layout Standard
10303 \begin_inset Tabular
10304 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10305 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10306 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10307 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10392 \begin_layout Verse
10396 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10406 arg "depth-increment"
10412 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10418 \begin_inset Newline newline
10426 arg "depth-decrement"
10433 \begin_layout Enumerate
10438 : level #1) This is another item.
10439 Note that selecting a
10443 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10444 3 times to put the table inside the
10452 \begin_layout Quotation
10453 We're now ending the
10457 list and changing to
10462 We're still at level #1.
10463 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10464 The next set of paragraphs is a
10465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10472 We will nest both the
10479 \begin_inset space ~
10484 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10488 for the letter body.
10492 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10495 to preserve the depth.
10496 Remember that you need to use
10499 arg "newline-insert newline"
10502 to create multiple lines inside the
10509 \begin_inset space ~
10519 \begin_layout Right Address
10521 \begin_inset Newline newline
10524 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10525 \begin_inset Newline newline
10531 \begin_layout Address
10533 \begin_inset space ~
10539 \begin_layout Quotation
10540 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10544 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10545 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10546 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10547 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10548 as soon as possible.
10549 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10552 \begin_layout Quotation
10553 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10554 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10555 with your order, along with payment.
10558 \begin_layout Quotation
10559 We thank you again for your patience.
10562 \begin_layout Address
10564 \begin_inset Newline newline
10571 \begin_layout Quotation
10572 That ends that example!
10575 \begin_layout Standard
10576 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10577 gives you a lot of power with just
10579 We could have easily nested an
10600 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10603 \begin_layout Subsection
10605 \begin_inset Index idx
10608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10609 Nesting ! Separation
10615 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10617 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10624 \begin_layout Standard
10625 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10627 For example you need two different enumerations:
10630 \begin_layout Enumerate
10635 \begin_layout Enumerate
10640 \begin_layout Enumerate
10644 \begin_layout Standard
10645 \begin_inset Separator plain
10651 \begin_layout Itemize
10657 \begin_layout Standard
10658 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10664 \begin_layout Enumerate
10668 \begin_layout Enumerate
10672 \begin_layout Enumerate
10676 \begin_layout Standard
10677 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10678 list item and use the menu
10680 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10681 Separated <Name> Above
10685 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10686 Separated <Name> Below
10689 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10690 ) and before or behind it the
10692 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10695 \begin_layout Standard
10696 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10697 (red arrow in LyX).
10698 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10699 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10702 \begin_layout Standard
10703 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10706 arg "paragraph-break"
10713 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10716 \begin_layout Section
10717 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10718 \begin_inset Index idx
10721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10730 \begin_layout Standard
10731 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10732 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10734 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10735 be broken at the end of a line.
10736 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10740 \begin_layout Subsection
10742 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10744 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10749 \begin_inset Index idx
10752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10761 \begin_layout Standard
10762 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10763 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10764 ) not to break the line at
10766 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10769 \begin_layout Quote
10770 Further documentation is given in section
10771 \begin_inset Newline newline
10775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10777 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10785 \begin_layout Standard
10786 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10801 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10810 A protected space is set with
10812 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10813 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10815 \begin_inset space ~
10823 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10829 \begin_layout Subsection
10831 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10833 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10838 \begin_inset Index idx
10841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10842 Spacing ! Horizontal
10850 \begin_layout Standard
10851 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10853 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10854 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10858 The length units are listed in Appendix
10859 \begin_inset space ~
10863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10865 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10872 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10874 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10876 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10881 \begin_inset Index idx
10884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10885 Spaces ! Inter-word
10893 \begin_layout Standard
10894 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10895 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10896 at the ends of sentences.
10897 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10898 automatically takes care about this.
10899 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10900 followed by a period; see section
10901 \begin_inset space ~
10905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10907 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10912 To insert a normal space, select
10914 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10915 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10917 \begin_inset space ~
10925 arg "space-insert normal"
10931 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10935 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10940 \begin_inset Index idx
10943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10952 \begin_layout Standard
10954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10961 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10970 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10971 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10972 inside abbreviations:
10975 \begin_layout Quote
10977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10981 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10984 \begin_layout Standard
10985 or between values and units.
10986 Compare for example this:
10987 \begin_inset Newline newline
10991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10995 \begin_inset Newline newline
10998 10 kg (normal space
11001 \begin_layout Standard
11002 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11004 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11005 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11007 \begin_inset space ~
11015 arg "space-insert thin"
11021 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11025 \begin_layout Standard
11026 You can also insert the following space types:
11029 \begin_layout Description
11031 \begin_inset space ~
11035 \begin_inset space ~
11038 space A line with a
11039 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11043 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11047 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11050 negative thin space between the arrows.
11053 \begin_layout Description
11055 \begin_inset space ~
11059 \begin_inset space ~
11062 space A line with a
11063 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11067 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11071 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11074 negative medium space between the arrows.
11077 \begin_layout Description
11079 \begin_inset space ~
11083 \begin_inset space ~
11086 space A line with a
11087 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11091 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11095 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11098 negative thick space between the arrows.
11101 \begin_layout Description
11103 \begin_inset space ~
11107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11111 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11115 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11119 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11123 \begin_inset space ~
11127 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11130 em) space between the arrows.
11133 \begin_layout Description
11135 \begin_inset space ~
11139 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11143 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11147 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11151 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11155 \begin_inset space ~
11159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11162 em) space between the arrows.
11165 \begin_layout Description
11167 \begin_inset space ~
11171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11175 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11179 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11183 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11187 \begin_inset space ~
11191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11194 em) space between the arrows.
11197 \begin_layout Description
11199 \begin_inset space ~
11203 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11207 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11212 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11219 cm space between the arrows.
11222 \begin_layout Standard
11224 \begin_inset space ~
11228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11230 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11234 lists the different space sizes.
11237 \begin_layout Standard
11238 \begin_inset Float table
11245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11246 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11249 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11251 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11255 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11265 \begin_inset Tabular
11266 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11267 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11268 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11269 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11309 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11357 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11381 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11385 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11389 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11437 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11452 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11465 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11480 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11508 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11542 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11544 \begin_inset Index idx
11547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11556 \begin_layout Standard
11557 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11558 feature for adding extra space
11559 in a uniform fashion.
11560 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11561 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11562 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11563 equally between themselves.
11566 \begin_layout Standard
11567 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11570 \begin_layout Quote
11572 This is on the left side
11573 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11576 This is on the right
11579 \begin_layout Quote
11582 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11586 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11592 \begin_layout Quote
11595 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11599 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11603 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11609 \begin_layout Standard
11610 That was an example in the
11616 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11620 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11624 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11627 is one in a standard paragraph.
11628 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11632 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11635 \begin_layout Standard
11636 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11639 \begin_inset space ~
11644 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11647 \begin_layout Standard
11649 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11653 \begin_inset space ~
11659 \begin_layout Standard
11661 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11665 \begin_inset space ~
11671 \begin_layout Standard
11673 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11677 \begin_inset space ~
11683 \begin_layout Standard
11685 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11689 \begin_inset space ~
11695 \begin_layout Standard
11697 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11701 \begin_inset space ~
11707 \begin_layout Standard
11709 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11713 \begin_inset space ~
11719 \begin_layout Standard
11720 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11728 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11732 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11734 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11735 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11739 option in the space dialog.
11747 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11751 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11756 \begin_inset Index idx
11759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11768 \begin_layout Standard
11769 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11770 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11773 \begin_layout Standard
11774 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11777 What is correct English?:
11778 \begin_inset Newline newline
11782 \begin_inset Newline newline
11786 \begin_inset space ~
11789 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11790 \begin_inset Newline newline
11794 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11805 \begin_inset Newline newline
11809 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11820 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11826 \begin_layout Standard
11828 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11833 \begin_inset space ~
11837 \begin_inset space ~
11841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11845 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11847 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11848 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11852 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11858 \begin_inset space ~
11862 \begin_inset space ~
11866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11869 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11878 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11879 That is why it is named
11880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11888 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11889 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11893 \begin_layout Subsection
11895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11897 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11902 \begin_inset Index idx
11905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11914 \begin_layout Standard
11915 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11917 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11918 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11920 \begin_inset space ~
11926 There you find the following sizes:
11929 \begin_layout Standard
11942 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11943 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11948 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11950 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11951 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11953 \begin_inset space ~
11959 \begin_inset Index idx
11962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11963 Document ! Settings
11968 for the paragraph separation.
11969 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11980 \begin_layout Standard
11986 \begin_inset Index idx
11989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11995 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11996 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12001 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12002 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12011 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12020 s are described in section
12021 \begin_inset space ~
12025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12027 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12036 If there are several
12040 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12041 You can therefore use
12045 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12048 \begin_layout Standard
12053 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12054 \begin_inset space ~
12058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12060 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12067 \begin_layout Standard
12068 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12078 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12079 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12091 \begin_layout Subsection
12092 Paragraph Alignment
12093 \begin_inset Index idx
12096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12097 Paragraph ! Alignment
12105 \begin_layout Standard
12106 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12108 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12111 dialog (toolbar button
12114 arg "layout-paragraph"
12118 There are five possibilities:
12121 \begin_layout Itemize
12129 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12135 \begin_layout Itemize
12143 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12149 \begin_layout Itemize
12157 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12163 \begin_layout Itemize
12171 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12177 \begin_layout Itemize
12185 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12191 \begin_layout Standard
12192 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12193 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12194 the left and right margins.
12195 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12198 \begin_layout Standard
12200 This paragraph is right aligned,
12203 \begin_layout Standard
12205 this one is centered,
12208 \begin_layout Standard
12210 this one is left aligned.
12213 \begin_layout Subsection
12215 \begin_inset Index idx
12218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12219 Page breaks ! Forced
12225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12227 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12234 \begin_layout Standard
12235 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12236 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12237 force a page break where you want one.
12238 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12239 is good at page breaking.
12240 Only if you use a lot of
12244 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12245 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12248 \begin_layout Standard
12249 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12250 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12254 have to change the page breaking.
12257 \begin_layout Standard
12258 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12260 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12262 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12263 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12265 \begin_inset space ~
12271 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12273 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12274 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12276 \begin_inset space ~
12281 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12283 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12284 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12287 \begin_layout Standard
12288 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12289 at the top of a page.
12290 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12292 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12293 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12294 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12298 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12302 to learn more about
12309 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12313 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12318 \begin_inset Index idx
12321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12322 Page breaks ! Clear
12330 \begin_layout Standard
12331 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12332 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12333 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12334 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12335 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12338 \begin_layout Standard
12339 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12341 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12342 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12344 \begin_inset space ~
12350 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12352 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12353 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12355 \begin_inset space ~
12359 \begin_inset space ~
12364 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12365 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12368 \begin_layout Subsection
12370 \begin_inset Index idx
12373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12382 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12389 \begin_layout Standard
12390 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12392 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12394 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12395 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12397 \begin_inset space ~
12401 \begin_inset space ~
12409 arg "newline-insert newline"
12413 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12415 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12416 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12418 \begin_inset space ~
12422 \begin_inset space ~
12430 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12433 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12435 This is useful to avoid
12436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12443 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12446 \begin_layout Standard
12447 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12448 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12450 very good at line breaking.
12451 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12452 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12453 \begin_inset space ~
12457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12459 reference "sec:Quote"
12464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12466 reference "sec:Verse"
12471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12473 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12480 \begin_layout Subsection
12482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12484 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12489 \begin_inset Index idx
12492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12501 \begin_layout Standard
12503 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12514 \begin_layout Standard
12518 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12519 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12521 \begin_inset space ~
12526 you can insert horizontal lines.
12527 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12528 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12529 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12532 \begin_layout Standard
12534 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12545 \begin_layout Section
12546 Characters and Symbols
12549 \begin_layout Standard
12550 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12551 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12552 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12560 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12564 for information on how this is done.
12567 \begin_layout Standard
12568 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12573 dialog via the menu
12575 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12576 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12582 \begin_layout Standard
12583 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12591 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12592 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12594 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12602 \begin_layout Section
12603 Fonts and Text Styles
12604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12606 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12613 \begin_layout Subsection
12615 \begin_inset Index idx
12618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12627 \begin_layout Standard
12628 There are two types of fonts:
12631 \begin_layout Description
12633 \begin_inset space ~
12637 \begin_inset Index idx
12640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12646 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12647 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12651 characters) in the font.
12652 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12653 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12654 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12655 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12656 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12657 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12658 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12659 \begin_inset Newline newline
12662 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12663 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12664 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12665 sizes than at small ones.
12666 \begin_inset Newline newline
12680 \begin_inset space ~
12688 \begin_layout Description
12690 \begin_inset space ~
12694 \begin_inset Index idx
12697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12703 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12704 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12705 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12706 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12707 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12708 image manipulation program.
12709 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12710 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12711 \begin_inset space ~
12714 pixels high up to 34
12715 \begin_inset space ~
12718 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12719 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12720 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12722 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12723 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12724 \begin_inset Newline newline
12727 Bitmap fonts are named
12730 \begin_inset space ~
12735 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12738 \begin_layout Standard
12739 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12740 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12741 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12742 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12743 use scalable fonts.
12746 \begin_layout Standard
12747 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12750 \begin_layout Standard
12751 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12753 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12755 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12758 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12759 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12760 font to emphasize text, you use an
12761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12769 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12771 In \SpecialChar LyX
12772 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12776 \begin_layout Subsection
12779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12781 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12788 \begin_layout Standard
12789 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12790 used its own fonts.
12791 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12792 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12795 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12796 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12797 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12798 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12799 to a word processor.
12800 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12801 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12802 files are very portable across
12803 different machines.
12804 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12805 has increased a lot
12806 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12809 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12811 \begin_inset space ~
12815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12817 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12822 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12823 code in the document
12824 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12827 \begin_layout Standard
12828 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12829 engines that are also able directly
12830 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12832 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12834 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12836 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12837 that is installed on your system.
12838 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12841 \begin_layout Standard
12842 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12850 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12851 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12859 \begin_layout Subsection
12860 Document Font and Font size
12861 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12863 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12868 \begin_inset Index idx
12871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12878 \begin_inset Index idx
12881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12890 \begin_layout Standard
12891 You can set the document fonts in the
12893 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12897 \begin_inset Index idx
12900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12901 Document ! Settings
12911 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12912 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12915 \begin_inset space ~
12924 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12926 \begin_inset space ~
12929 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12932 \begin_layout Standard
12937 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12938 This requires that you use
12950 as the output format, i.
12951 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12955 \begin_inset space \space{}
12958 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12959 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12960 installed (see section
12961 \begin_inset space ~
12965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12967 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12972 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12974 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12975 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12977 \begin_inset space ~
12980 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12981 cannot determine the family.
12982 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12983 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12986 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12989 \begin_layout Standard
12990 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12991 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12996 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13002 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13004 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13006 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13009 font encoding, this is
13010 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13011 , depending on the document language,
13014 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13015 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13023 \begin_inset space ~
13029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13039 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13040 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13048 \begin_inset space ~
13054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13062 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13083 European Computer Modern
13086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13094 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13097 \begin_layout Standard
13102 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13103 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13108 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13111 \begin_inset space ~
13116 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13122 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13123 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13126 \begin_layout Itemize
13130 \begin_inset space ~
13135 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13148 \begin_inset space ~
13153 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13154 community in order to replace
13158 as the default font.
13159 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13160 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13163 \begin_inset space ~
13176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13177 One difference is improved kerning.
13185 \begin_layout Itemize
13186 If you do not like the look of
13194 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13195 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13199 \begin_inset space ~
13205 \begin_inset space ~
13215 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13216 \begin_inset space ~
13219 serif and typewriter fonts,
13223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13224 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13225 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13231 \begin_inset space ~
13240 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13245 \begin_inset space \space{}
13253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13257 \begin_inset space \space{}
13263 \begin_inset space ~
13271 \begin_inset space ~
13281 but you can also select your own.
13282 \begin_inset Newline newline
13285 The differences between roman,
13288 \begin_inset space ~
13297 fonts are explained in section
13298 \begin_inset space ~
13302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13304 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13309 \begin_inset Newline newline
13315 \begin_inset space ~
13320 was originally designed for newspapers.
13321 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13322 into the small newspaper columns.
13326 \begin_inset space ~
13331 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13334 \begin_layout Standard
13335 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13348 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13353 depends on the class you are using.
13354 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13357 \begin_layout Standard
13358 Note that the font size is the
13363 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13364 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13365 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13366 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13369 \begin_inset space ~
13375 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13376 \begin_inset space ~
13380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13382 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13389 \begin_layout Standard
13393 \begin_inset space ~
13398 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13400 \begin_inset space ~
13403 serif or typewriter.
13408 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13418 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13421 \begin_layout Standard
13426 LaTeX font encoding
13428 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13429 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13435 \begin_inset Index idx
13438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13446 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13448 \begin_inset space ~
13452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13454 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13461 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13462 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13463 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13467 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13475 \begin_layout Standard
13476 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13478 Use Old Style Figures
13482 Use True Small Caps
13485 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13488 Use Old Style Figures
13490 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13492 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13500 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13504 Use True Small Caps
13506 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13507 of scaled capitals.
13508 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13509 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13512 \begin_layout Standard
13517 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13518 a font to display the script characters.
13522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13523 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13529 \begin_inset Index idx
13532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13539 So this has no effect for the document language
13555 \begin_layout Standard
13558 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13560 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13561 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13567 \begin_inset Index idx
13570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13572 packages ! microtype
13581 \begin_layout Standard
13584 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13586 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13591 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13592 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13598 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13599 \begin_inset space ~
13603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13605 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13615 \begin_layout Standard
13616 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13620 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13628 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13633 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13634 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13636 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13638 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13641 dialog, see section
13642 \begin_inset space ~
13646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13648 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13660 \begin_layout Subsection
13664 \begin_layout Standard
13665 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13666 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13668 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13669 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13670 choose a math font in the dialog
13672 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13676 \begin_inset Index idx
13679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13680 Document ! Settings
13686 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13687 automatically selects a math font.
13688 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13689 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13698 \begin_inset space ~
13704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13709 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13710 document font is available.
13713 \begin_layout Standard
13714 Note that the math font will not be used for
13718 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13724 or by the insertion of the command
13731 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13732 \begin_inset space ~
13736 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13737 while the math characters do not.
13739 \begin_inset space ~
13742 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13745 \begin_inset space ~
13753 \begin_inset space ~
13758 in the document font settings.
13761 \begin_layout Standard
13762 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13763 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13764 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13765 font (in most cases
13766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13772 \begin_inset space ~
13778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13781 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13782 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13790 \begin_inset space ~
13796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13802 \begin_layout Subsection
13804 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
13806 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
13810 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13812 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13814 name "subsec:charstyles"
13821 \begin_inset Index idx
13824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13831 \begin_inset Index idx
13834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13843 \begin_layout Standard
13844 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13845 automatically changes the
13846 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
13849 style for certain paragraph environments.
13851 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
13852 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13854 This is where we meet the concept of
13860 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
13862 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
13866 \begin_layout Standard
13868 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
13873 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
13875 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
13888 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
13894 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13897 e., available with all document classes.
13898 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13902 for specific purposes.
13903 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
13906 \begin_layout Standard
13908 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
13909 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13919 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13923 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13924 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13936 — you customized the
13941 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13942 among them, encourage the use of
13954 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13955 \begin_inset space ~
13959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13961 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13966 Rather than fiddling with
13970 , they encourage the use of
13974 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
13975 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13979 \begin_inset Quotes els
13983 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13986 ), not their form (
13987 \begin_inset Quotes els
13991 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13995 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
13996 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
13997 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
13998 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
13999 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14000 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14006 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14010 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14011 With a semantic markup (such as
14015 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14020 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14022 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14023 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14026 \begin_layout Standard
14028 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14029 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14030 by \SpecialChar LyX
14036 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14038 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14039 Builtin Text Styles
14040 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14042 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14049 \begin_layout Standard
14051 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14052 The two builtin text styles can be
14053 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14057 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14061 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14062 both of these styles
14065 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14073 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14079 \begin_layout Standard
14084 style, do one of the following:
14087 \begin_layout Itemize
14088 click on the toolbar button
14097 \begin_layout Itemize
14098 use the key binding
14105 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14109 \begin_layout Itemize
14111 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14119 arg "dialog-show character"
14125 arg "dialog-show character"
14128 ) as described in section
14129 \begin_inset space ~
14133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14135 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14144 \begin_layout Standard
14145 These commands are all toggles.
14150 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14153 \begin_layout Standard
14154 One typically uses the
14158 style for proper names.
14160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14167 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14173 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14177 \begin_layout Standard
14179 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14184 is producing text in
14188 , but the definition can be changed.
14193 \begin_layout Standard
14195 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14197 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14205 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14212 \begin_layout Itemize
14213 clicking on the toolbar button
14222 \begin_layout Itemize
14223 using the keybindings
14230 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14234 \begin_layout Itemize
14236 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14244 arg "dialog-show character"
14250 arg "dialog-show character"
14253 ) as described in section
14254 \begin_inset space ~
14258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14260 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14269 \begin_layout Standard
14274 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14276 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14278 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14281 packages use a different font
14282 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14283 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14289 \begin_layout Standard
14290 We've been using the
14294 style all over the place in this document.
14295 Here's one more example:
14298 \begin_layout Quotation
14302 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14304 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14310 \begin_layout Standard
14311 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14312 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14313 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14314 the common tendency to overuse
14315 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14317 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14322 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14326 \begin_layout Standard
14328 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14329 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14330 only as font changes and integrated in the
14338 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14341 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14348 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14350 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14354 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14357 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14359 \begin_inset space ~
14362 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14364 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14370 arg "dialog-show character"
14376 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14378 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14384 arg "dialog-show character"
14388 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14392 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14394 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14398 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14405 \begin_layout Standard
14407 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14408 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14410 \begin_inset space ~
14414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14416 reference "subsec:Modules"
14423 ), or local layout settings (see section
14424 \begin_inset space ~
14428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14430 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14435 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14439 markup for specific functions.
14440 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14445 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14455 \begin_inset Quotes els
14459 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14465 \begin_layout Standard
14467 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14468 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14470 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14476 \begin_layout Standard
14478 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14479 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14484 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14485 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14486 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14491 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14492 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14497 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14505 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14506 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14507 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14508 \begin_inset Flex Code
14511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14513 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14522 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14527 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14536 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14541 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14550 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14551 on screen their formal appearance.
14556 \begin_layout Subsection
14558 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14560 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14564 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14570 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14572 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14578 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14580 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14584 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14586 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14591 \begin_inset Index idx
14594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14603 \begin_layout Standard
14604 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14605 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14608 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14610 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14612 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14616 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14617 the properties of text passages
14618 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14622 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14623 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14624 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14625 from ordinary dialog.
14626 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14630 \begin_layout Standard
14632 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14633 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14634 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14635 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14636 the properties of the respective text passages.
14641 comes in as a last resort.
14646 \begin_layout Standard
14647 Before we document how to
14648 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14649 use custom character style
14650 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14651 tweak the text properties
14653 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14654 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14656 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14660 \begin_inset Newline newline
14663 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14664 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14667 \begin_layout Standard
14669 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14670 use custom character styles
14671 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14672 tweak text properties
14675 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14678 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14680 \begin_inset space ~
14683 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14685 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14691 arg "dialog-show character"
14696 dialog or press the toolbar button
14699 arg "dialog-show character"
14704 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14707 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14708 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14710 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14713 property that you can choose.
14714 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14717 \begin_inset space ~
14722 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14724 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14728 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14730 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14735 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14736 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14737 environments all at once.
14740 \begin_layout Standard
14742 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14744 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14747 properties, and their options (in addition to
14750 \begin_inset space ~
14756 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14760 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14768 \begin_layout Labeling
14769 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14783 The possible options are:
14787 \begin_layout Labeling
14788 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14793 This is the Roman font family.
14794 Normally a serif font.
14795 It's also the default family.
14805 \begin_layout Labeling
14806 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14810 \begin_inset space ~
14817 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14829 \begin_layout Labeling
14830 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14837 This is the Typewriter font family.
14843 arg "font-typewriter"
14849 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
14853 \begin_layout Standard
14855 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
14856 The general differences of these families are:
14859 \begin_layout Itemize
14861 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
14866 fonts use characters with serifs.
14867 These are the small
14868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14875 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14876 The following example shows the difference:
14877 \begin_inset Newline newline
14881 \begin_inset Newline newline
14886 text without serifs
14889 \begin_inset Newline newline
14892 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14893 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14900 \begin_layout Itemize
14902 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14907 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14908 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14909 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14912 \begin_layout Itemize
14914 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14927 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14945 \begin_inset Newline newline
14949 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14954 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14965 \begin_inset Note Note
14968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14970 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14971 For more on phantoms see section
14972 \begin_inset space ~
14976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14978 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14988 \begin_inset Newline newline
14997 \begin_layout Labeling
14998 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15003 This corresponds to the print weight.
15008 \begin_layout Labeling
15009 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15014 This is the Medium font series.
15015 It's also the default series.
15018 \begin_layout Labeling
15019 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15026 This is the Bold font series.
15039 \begin_layout Labeling
15040 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15045 As the name implies.
15050 \begin_layout Labeling
15051 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15056 This is the Upright font shape.
15057 It's also the default shape.
15060 \begin_layout Labeling
15061 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15071 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15076 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15081 s the Italic font shape
15087 \begin_layout Labeling
15088 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15095 This is the Slanted font shape
15097 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15098 , this is different from italic).
15101 \begin_layout Labeling
15102 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15106 \begin_inset space ~
15113 This is the Small caps font shape
15120 \begin_layout Labeling
15121 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15126 Alters the text color.
15127 Note that not all DVI
15128 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15130 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15133 viewers are able to display colors.
15135 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15139 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15141 \begin_inset space ~
15148 , which means that the document default color set in
15150 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15151 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15157 \begin_inset space ~
15163 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15165 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15169 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15249 \begin_inset Index idx
15252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15261 \begin_layout Labeling
15262 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15267 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15268 the language of the document.
15269 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15270 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15271 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15274 in blue to indicate the change
15275 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15276 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15280 \begin_inset Newline newline
15283 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15285 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15286 When using the spell checking (see section
15287 \begin_inset space ~
15291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15293 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15297 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15298 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15300 \begin_inset Newline newline
15303 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15305 Exclude from Spellchecking
15308 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15311 \begin_layout Labeling
15312 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15317 Alters the size of the font.
15319 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15321 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15325 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15328 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15329 document font size.
15330 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15331 the details, but a general description of what
15337 \begin_layout Labeling
15338 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15359 arg "font-size tiny"
15365 \begin_layout Labeling
15366 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15387 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15393 \begin_layout Labeling
15394 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15415 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15421 \begin_layout Labeling
15422 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15443 arg "font-size small"
15449 \begin_layout Labeling
15450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15464 It's also the default size.
15468 arg "font-size normal"
15474 \begin_layout Labeling
15475 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15496 arg "font-size large"
15502 \begin_layout Labeling
15503 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15524 arg "font-size larger"
15530 \begin_layout Labeling
15531 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15552 arg "font-size largest"
15558 \begin_layout Labeling
15559 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15580 arg "font-size huge"
15586 \begin_layout Labeling
15587 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15608 arg "font-size giant"
15614 \begin_layout Labeling
15615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15620 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15640 arg "font-size increase"
15646 \begin_layout Labeling
15647 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15652 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15672 arg "font-size decrease"
15679 \begin_layout Standard
15684 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15685 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15687 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15688 — use those instead.
15689 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15692 \begin_layout Labeling
15693 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15695 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15699 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15705 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15706 change a few other things at the character level
15707 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15708 have text passages being underlined
15712 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15713 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15714 days, when you could not change fonts.
15715 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15716 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15717 because some people
15721 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15728 \begin_layout Labeling
15729 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15731 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15738 This is text with emphasize on
15741 This might seem like the same as
15745 , but it is actually a bit different.
15751 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15753 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15754 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15758 \begin_layout Labeling
15759 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15761 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15766 Don't use underlining.
15771 \begin_layout Labeling
15772 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15774 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15778 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15786 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15788 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15797 arg "font-underline"
15803 \begin_inset Newline newline
15807 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15810 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15811 when you could not change fonts.
15812 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15813 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15814 because some people
15818 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15823 \begin_layout Labeling
15824 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15828 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15830 \begin_inset space ~
15839 This is text with Double under
15840 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
15842 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
15851 arg "font-underunderline"
15855 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
15857 \begin_inset Newline newline
15860 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15861 about double underbar
15866 \begin_layout Labeling
15867 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15871 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
15873 \begin_inset space ~
15882 This is text with Wavy under
15883 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
15885 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
15894 arg "font-underwave"
15898 \begin_inset Newline newline
15901 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15902 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15903 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
15908 \begin_layout Labeling
15909 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15911 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
15916 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15922 \begin_layout Labeling
15923 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15925 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
15930 Don't use strikethrough.
15933 \begin_layout Labeling
15934 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15938 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
15940 \begin_inset space ~
15944 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
15952 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
15954 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
15955 Single strikethrough
15963 arg "font-strikeout"
15967 \begin_inset Newline newline
15970 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15971 changed in the meantime.
15974 \begin_layout Labeling
15975 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15977 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
15981 \begin_inset space ~
15985 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
15987 \begin_inset space ~
15991 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
15999 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16001 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16007 \begin_inset Newline newline
16010 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16014 \begin_layout Standard
16016 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16017 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16018 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16019 \begin_inset space ~
16023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16025 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16032 \begin_layout Itemize
16034 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16041 This is text with emphasize on
16046 \begin_layout Itemize
16050 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16057 This is text with Noun on.
16059 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16066 , this is a logical attribute.
16067 Normally it's equivalent to
16070 \begin_inset space ~
16080 \begin_layout Standard
16081 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16082 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16084 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16089 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16090 chosen a new character style
16091 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16092 applied a text property
16095 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16098 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16100 \begin_inset space ~
16103 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16105 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16111 arg "dialog-show character"
16119 arg "dialog-show character"
16122 ) dialog, the settings are
16123 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16127 You can activate the
16128 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16130 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16131 last applied properties
16133 by using the toolbar button
16136 arg "textstyle-apply"
16140 The button lets you apply
16141 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16142 your custom character style
16143 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16146 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16148 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16149 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16150 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16151 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16156 \begin_layout Standard
16157 To completely reset the
16158 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16160 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16161 text properties of a selection
16163 to the default, use
16164 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16166 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16176 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16181 from the menu of the toolbar button
16184 arg "textstyle-apply"
16191 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16192 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16193 you just set the shape to
16194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16212 \begin_inset space ~
16226 \begin_layout Standard
16228 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16229 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16237 \begin_inset space ~
16249 \begin_layout Itemize
16251 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16264 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16282 \begin_inset Newline newline
16286 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16300 \begin_inset Note Note
16303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16304 For more on phantoms see section
16305 \begin_inset space ~
16309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16311 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16321 \begin_inset Newline newline
16327 \begin_layout Itemize
16329 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16334 fonts use characters with serifs.
16335 These are the small
16336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16343 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16344 The following example shows the difference:
16345 \begin_inset Newline newline
16349 \begin_inset Newline newline
16354 text without serifs
16357 \begin_inset Newline newline
16360 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16361 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16368 \begin_layout Itemize
16370 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16375 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16376 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16377 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16382 \begin_layout Standard
16384 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16392 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16393 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16396 \begin_inset space ~
16401 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16402 the property to be removed.
16403 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16404 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16405 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16423 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16424 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16432 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16436 \begin_inset space ~
16441 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16452 If you, for example, set
16453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16471 \begin_inset space ~
16476 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16485 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16490 \begin_layout Standard
16492 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16495 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16496 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16499 \begin_layout Section
16500 Printing and Previewing
16503 \begin_layout Subsection
16507 \begin_layout Standard
16508 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16509 using \SpecialChar LyX
16510 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16511 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16512 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16513 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16515 Additional Features
16520 \begin_layout Standard
16522 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16525 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16526 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16527 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16530 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16531 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16532 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16533 to turn your writing into printable output.
16534 This happens in two stages:
16537 \begin_layout Enumerate
16538 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16539 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16541 a file with the extension,
16542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16556 \begin_layout Enumerate
16557 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16558 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16559 to use the commands in the
16563 file to produce printable output.
16566 \begin_layout Subsection
16567 Output file formats
16568 \begin_inset Index idx
16571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16578 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16580 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16587 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16588 Simple text (ASCII)
16589 \begin_inset Index idx
16592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16593 File formats ! ASCII
16601 \begin_layout Standard
16602 This file type has the extension
16603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16615 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16619 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16626 \begin_layout Standard
16627 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16629 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16630 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16632 \begin_inset space ~
16638 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16639 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16640 bibliography (section
16641 \begin_inset space ~
16645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16647 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16652 If your document includes such material, use
16654 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16655 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16657 \begin_inset space ~
16661 \begin_inset space ~
16665 \begin_inset space ~
16673 \begin_inset space ~
16677 \begin_inset space ~
16683 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16684 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16690 \begin_inset Index idx
16693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16694 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16703 \begin_layout Standard
16704 This file type has the extension
16705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16716 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16719 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16720 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16721 -Errors or to process it manually
16722 with console commands.
16723 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16724 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16725 's temporary directory whenever you
16726 view or export your document.
16729 \begin_layout Standard
16730 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16731 -file using the menu
16733 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16734 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16738 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16739 export variants are explained in section
16740 \begin_inset space ~
16744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16746 reference "subsec:Export"
16753 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16755 \begin_inset Index idx
16758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16767 \begin_layout Standard
16768 This file type has the extension
16769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16789 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16790 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16791 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16795 \begin_layout Standard
16796 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16797 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16798 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16799 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16800 when you view the DVI.
16801 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16804 \begin_layout Standard
16805 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16807 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16808 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16813 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16814 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16816 \begin_inset space ~
16822 The latter option uses the program
16824 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16830 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16833 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16834 font access (see section
16835 \begin_inset space ~
16839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16841 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16846 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16847 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16852 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16854 \begin_inset Index idx
16857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16858 File formats ! PostScript
16866 \begin_layout Standard
16867 This file type has the extension
16868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16880 PostScript was developed by the company
16884 as a printer language.
16885 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16887 PostScript can be seen as a
16888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16891 programming language
16892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16895 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16900 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16907 \begin_inset Index idx
16910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16912 packages ! pstricks
16922 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16925 \begin_layout Standard
16926 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16930 Encapsulated PostScript
16931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16934 (EPS, file extension
16935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16947 As \SpecialChar LyX
16948 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16949 convert them in the background to EPS.
16950 If, for example, you have 50
16951 \begin_inset space ~
16954 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16956 \begin_inset space ~
16959 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16960 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16962 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16963 EPS to avoid this problem.
16966 \begin_layout Standard
16967 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16969 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16970 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16976 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16978 \begin_inset Index idx
16981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16988 \begin_inset Index idx
16991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17000 \begin_layout Standard
17001 This file type has the extension
17002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17018 Portable Document Format
17019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17026 was derived from PostScript.
17027 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17036 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17037 looks exactly the same.
17040 \begin_layout Standard
17041 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17045 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17049 (JPG, file extension
17050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17077 Portable Network Graphics
17078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17081 (PNG, file extension
17082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17094 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17095 converts them in the
17096 background to one of these formats.
17097 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17098 will slow down your workflow.
17099 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17102 \begin_layout Standard
17103 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17105 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17111 \begin_layout Description
17113 \begin_inset space ~
17116 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17120 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17123 \begin_layout Description
17125 \begin_inset space ~
17132 ) This uses the program
17134 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17137 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17140 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17143 is a new engine, derived from
17147 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17148 access (see section
17149 \begin_inset space ~
17153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17155 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17160 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17161 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17166 \begin_layout Description
17168 \begin_inset space ~
17175 ) This uses the program
17180 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17186 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17187 font access (see section
17188 \begin_inset space ~
17192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17194 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17199 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17200 vertically written Japanese.
17203 \begin_layout Description
17205 \begin_inset space ~
17208 (cropped) This is the same as
17211 \begin_inset space ~
17216 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17217 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17218 to generate good-looking
17219 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17222 \begin_layout Description
17224 \begin_inset space ~
17227 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17231 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17235 \begin_layout Description
17237 \begin_inset space ~
17240 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17244 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17245 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17249 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17250 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17253 \begin_layout Standard
17257 \begin_inset space ~
17266 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17267 works without problems.
17268 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17269 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17273 \begin_inset space ~
17281 \begin_inset space ~
17286 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17294 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17296 \begin_inset Index idx
17299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17300 FileFormats ! XHTML
17306 \begin_inset Index idx
17309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17318 \begin_layout Standard
17319 This file type has the extension
17320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17332 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17333 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17334 When \SpecialChar LyX
17335 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17336 suitable for the purpose.
17337 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17339 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17340 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17343 between different formats, which are described in section
17345 Math Output in XHTML
17350 \begin_inset space ~
17358 \begin_layout Standard
17359 XHTML output remains
17360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17367 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17368 features are supported yet.
17372 and the World Wide Web
17376 Additional Features
17378 manual, for more information.
17381 \begin_layout Standard
17382 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17384 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17385 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17391 \begin_layout Subsection
17393 \begin_inset Index idx
17396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17405 \begin_layout Standard
17406 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17407 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17416 or use the toolbar button
17423 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17424 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17425 \begin_inset space ~
17429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17431 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17435 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17437 \begin_inset space ~
17441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17443 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17448 Further output formats can be selected via
17450 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17451 View (Other Formats)
17453 or the toolbar button
17462 \begin_layout Standard
17463 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17464 viewer window using the menu
17466 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17471 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17472 Update (Other Formats)
17477 \begin_layout Standard
17478 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17481 To have a real output, export your document.
17484 \begin_layout Section
17485 A few Words about Typography
17486 \begin_inset Index idx
17489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17498 \begin_layout Subsection
17499 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17500 \begin_inset Index idx
17503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17510 \begin_inset Index idx
17513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17522 \begin_layout Standard
17523 In \SpecialChar LyX
17525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17536 symbol comes in four variants: the
17553 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17559 \begin_layout Standard
17560 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17570 height_special "totalheight"
17575 backgroundcolor "none"
17578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17579 \begin_inset Tabular
17580 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17581 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17582 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17583 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17584 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17585 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17586 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17614 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17615 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17654 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17655 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17677 system key combination
17681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17682 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17694 and the em dash with
17697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17710 is the Mac label for the right
17721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17734 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17735 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17757 system key combination or
17758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17772 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17785 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17824 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17830 \begin_layout Standard
17831 Dashes can also be inserted with
17833 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17835 \begin_inset space ~
17838 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17846 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17847 and 2014 for the en dash).
17850 \begin_layout Standard
17851 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17852 mode and has a length of its own.
17853 Here are some examples:
17856 \begin_layout Enumerate
17857 line- and page-breaks
17858 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17868 \begin_layout Enumerate
17870 \begin_inset space ~
17874 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17884 \begin_layout Enumerate
17885 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17886 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17896 \begin_layout Enumerate
17897 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17901 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17911 \begin_layout Standard
17913 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17915 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17916 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17924 \begin_layout Subsection
17925 Dashes and Line Breaks
17926 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17928 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17935 \begin_layout Standard
17936 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17937 case and locale, e.
17938 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17944 \begin_layout Itemize
17945 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17946 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17949 \begin_layout Itemize
17950 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17954 \begin_layout Itemize
17955 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17956 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17959 \begin_layout Standard
17960 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17961 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17972 allows line breaks after hyphens
17973 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
17975 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
17978 en-dashes and em-dashes.
17981 \begin_layout Enumerate
17982 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
17983 \begin_inset space ~
17986 – common in British English and generally recommended by
17988 The Elements of Typographic Style
17991 \begin_inset space ~
17994 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
17997 \begin_layout Enumerate
17998 Unwanted line breaks
18003 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18005 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18008 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18015 Prevent Hyphenation
18020 \begin_inset space ~
18036 in \SpecialChar TeX
18038 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18039 , a protected space does not suffice
18043 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18050 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18051 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18052 in the document language.
18053 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18067 \begin_layout Itemize
18069 \begin_inset space ~
18073 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18083 height_special "totalheight"
18088 backgroundcolor "none"
18091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18100 \begin_layout Itemize
18102 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18112 height_special "totalheight"
18117 backgroundcolor "none"
18120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18122 \begin_inset space ~
18130 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18131 \begin_inset space ~
18134 – sont très utiles.
18137 \begin_layout Itemize
18142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18151 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18155 \begin_layout Standard
18156 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18157 \begin_inset space ~
18160 – in contrast to an overfull line
18161 \begin_inset space ~
18164 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18168 \begin_layout Standard
18169 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18172 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18173 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18174 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18175 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18180 \begin_layout Enumerate
18181 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18182 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18183 or \SpecialChar TeX
18189 \begin_layout Itemize
18191 \begin_inset space ~
18194 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18195 \begin_inset space ~
18198 – sont très utiles.
18202 \begin_layout Enumerate
18203 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18204 \begin_inset Newline newline
18209 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18210 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18211 Optional line break
18217 \begin_layout Itemize
18218 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18219 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18220 should be followed by
18221 a line break opportunity.
18224 \begin_layout Standard
18225 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18226 \begin_inset space ~
18230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18232 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18243 \begin_layout Enumerate
18244 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18245 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18246 or en dashes (see section
18247 \begin_inset space ~
18251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18253 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18263 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18264 Changes and backwards compatibility
18267 \begin_layout Standard
18268 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18270 \begin_inset space ~
18273 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18274 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18283 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18284 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18292 \begin_layout Standard
18293 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18295 \begin_inset space ~
18298 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18300 prevents ligation to dashes.
18302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18309 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18314 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18315 after the input (unless the current text font is
18323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18324 The behavior was changed since
18325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18340 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18341 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18342 as non-breakable dashes.
18343 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18352 \begin_layout Standard
18355 \begin_inset space ~
18363 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18365 \begin_inset space ~
18368 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18371 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18372 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18373 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18374 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18376 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18380 If you used both literal and
18381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18388 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18390 \begin_inset space ~
18393 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18394 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18397 \begin_layout Subsection
18399 \begin_inset Index idx
18402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18411 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18418 \begin_layout Standard
18419 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18420 but automatically in the output.
18421 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18427 \begin_inset Index idx
18430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18437 following the rules of the document language.
18439 does not hyphenate text in the
18443 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18446 \begin_layout Standard
18448 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18452 font and with unusual constructs, like
18453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18461 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18462 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18463 This is done with the menu
18465 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18466 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18468 \begin_inset space ~
18474 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18476 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18480 \begin_layout Standard
18481 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18482 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18493 would then see the hyphen
18494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18501 as a line break possibility.
18502 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18503 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18506 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18507 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18510 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18512 Prevent Hyphenation
18517 \begin_inset space ~
18525 \begin_layout Subsection
18527 \begin_inset Index idx
18530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18539 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18540 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18541 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18543 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18550 \begin_layout Standard
18551 When \SpecialChar LyX
18552 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18553 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18555 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18561 appropriate amount of space.
18562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18565 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18567 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18568 gets after another word.
18571 \begin_layout Standard
18572 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18573 not work in all cases.
18575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18586 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18587 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18590 \begin_layout Standard
18591 Here are some examples of
18595 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18598 \begin_layout Itemize
18603 \begin_layout Itemize
18608 \begin_layout Standard
18609 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18612 \begin_layout Itemize
18614 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18618 this is too much space!
18621 \begin_layout Itemize
18626 \begin_layout Standard
18627 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18630 \begin_layout Standard
18631 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18634 \begin_layout Enumerate
18638 \begin_inset space ~
18643 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18644 \begin_inset space ~
18648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18650 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18655 \begin_inset Index idx
18658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18659 Spaces ! inter-word
18667 \begin_layout Enumerate
18671 \begin_inset space ~
18676 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18677 \begin_inset space ~
18681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18683 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18688 \begin_inset Index idx
18691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18700 \begin_layout Enumerate
18704 \begin_inset space ~
18708 \begin_inset space ~
18712 \begin_inset space ~
18719 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18721 \begin_inset space ~
18726 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18727 This function is also bound to
18730 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18736 \begin_layout Standard
18737 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18740 \begin_layout Itemize
18742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18746 \begin_inset space \space{}
18749 this is too much space!
18752 \begin_layout Itemize
18753 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18757 \begin_layout Standard
18758 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18759 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18761 will take care of this.
18764 \begin_layout Standard
18765 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18769 \begin_inset space ~
18775 feature described in the section
18777 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18782 Additional Features
18787 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18789 \begin_inset Index idx
18792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18793 Typography ! Quotation marks
18799 \begin_inset Index idx
18802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18803 Quotation marks | see
18807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18833 \begin_layout Standard
18835 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18836 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18837 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18847 The keyboard character,
18851 , generates this automatically.
18854 \begin_layout Standard
18855 You can specify what character the
18859 key produces by using the submenu
18865 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18869 \begin_inset Index idx
18872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18873 Document ! Settings
18878 dialog and switching the
18882 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18883 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18885 \begin_inset space ~
18891 \begin_layout Labeling
18892 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18904 \begin_inset space ~
18908 \begin_inset space ~
18912 \begin_inset Quotes els
18916 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18930 \begin_inset Quotes els
18934 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18937 quotation marks (as common, e.
18938 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18944 \begin_layout Labeling
18945 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18948 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18952 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18956 \begin_inset space ~
18960 \begin_inset space ~
18964 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18968 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18974 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18978 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18982 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18986 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18989 quotation marks (as common, e.
18990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18996 \begin_layout Labeling
18997 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19000 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19004 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19008 \begin_inset space ~
19012 \begin_inset space ~
19016 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19020 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19026 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19030 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19034 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19038 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19041 quotation marks (as common, e.
19042 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19048 \begin_layout Labeling
19049 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19052 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19056 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19060 \begin_inset space ~
19064 \begin_inset space ~
19068 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19072 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19078 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19082 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19086 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19090 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19093 quotation marks (as common, e.
19094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19100 \begin_layout Labeling
19101 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19104 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19108 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19112 \begin_inset space ~
19116 \begin_inset space ~
19120 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19124 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19130 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19134 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19138 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19142 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19145 quotation marks (as common, e.
19146 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19149 g., in Switzerland)
19152 \begin_layout Labeling
19153 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19156 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19160 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19164 \begin_inset space ~
19168 \begin_inset space ~
19172 \begin_inset Quotes als
19176 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19182 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19186 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19190 \begin_inset Quotes als
19194 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19197 quotation marks (as common, e.
19198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19204 \begin_layout Labeling
19205 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19208 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19212 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19216 \begin_inset space ~
19220 \begin_inset space ~
19224 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19228 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19234 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19238 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19242 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19246 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19249 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19252 \begin_layout Labeling
19253 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19256 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19260 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19264 \begin_inset space ~
19268 \begin_inset space ~
19272 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19276 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19282 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19286 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19290 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19294 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19297 quotation marks (as common, e.
19298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19301 g., in Great Britain)
19304 \begin_layout Labeling
19305 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19308 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19312 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19316 \begin_inset space ~
19320 \begin_inset space ~
19324 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19328 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19334 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19338 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19342 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19346 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19349 quotation marks (as common, e.
19350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19356 \begin_layout Labeling
19357 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19360 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19364 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19368 \begin_inset space ~
19372 \begin_inset space ~
19376 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19380 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19386 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19390 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19394 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19398 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19401 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19406 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19407 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19408 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19409 the inner marks differ).
19417 \begin_layout Labeling
19418 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19421 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19425 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19429 \begin_inset space ~
19433 \begin_inset space ~
19437 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19441 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19447 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19451 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19455 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19459 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19462 quotation marks (as common, e.
19463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19469 \begin_layout Labeling
19470 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19473 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19477 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19481 \begin_inset space ~
19485 \begin_inset space ~
19489 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19493 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19499 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19503 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19507 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19511 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19514 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19517 \begin_layout Labeling
19518 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19519 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19527 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19533 \begin_inset space ~
19537 \begin_inset space ~
19543 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19551 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19555 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19559 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19563 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19567 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19570 quotation marks (as common, e.
19571 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19579 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19580 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19588 \begin_layout Labeling
19589 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19590 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19598 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19604 \begin_inset space ~
19608 \begin_inset space ~
19614 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19622 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19626 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19630 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19634 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19638 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19641 quotation marks (as common, e.
19642 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19645 g., in North Korea and China)
19649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19650 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19651 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19659 \begin_layout Standard
19660 Inner quotation marks
19664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19665 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19666 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19667 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19675 does not necessarily mean
19676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19684 This is why we call them
19685 \begin_inset Quotes els
19689 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19705 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19707 \begin_inset Quotes els
19711 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19714 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19717 arg "quote-insert inner"
19722 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19728 \begin_layout Standard
19729 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19730 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19731 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19732 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19733 If you check the setting
19735 Use dynamic quotation marks
19739 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19740 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19743 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19744 they appear in a special color).
19745 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19746 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19751 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19754 \begin_layout Standard
19755 Individual quotation marks (i.
19756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19759 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19760 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19764 \begin_layout Subsection
19766 \begin_inset Index idx
19769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19770 Typography ! Ligatures
19776 \begin_inset Index idx
19779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19810 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19817 \begin_layout Standard
19818 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19819 print them as single characters.
19820 These groups are known as
19825 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19826 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19828 Here are the standard ligatures:
19831 \begin_layout Itemize
19835 \begin_layout Itemize
19839 \begin_layout Itemize
19843 \begin_layout Itemize
19847 \begin_layout Itemize
19851 \begin_layout Standard
19852 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19855 \begin_layout Standard
19856 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19857 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19865 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19881 To break a ligature, use
19883 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19884 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19886 \begin_inset space ~
19893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19904 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19921 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19929 \begin_layout Subsection
19931 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19933 \begin_inset Index idx
19936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19946 \begin_layout Standard
19949 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19950 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19954 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
19957 \begin_layout Description
19959 The name of the game.
19962 \begin_layout Description
19964 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
19968 \begin_layout Description
19970 The \SpecialChar TeX
19971 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
19975 \begin_layout Description
19976 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
19977 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19981 \begin_layout Standard
19982 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19988 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
19992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19996 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
19997 world to give programs geek version numbers.
19998 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
19999 converges to the number
20000 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20003 : The actual version is
20004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20012 , the previous one was
20013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20024 \begin_layout Subsection
20026 \begin_inset Index idx
20029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20038 \begin_layout Standard
20039 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20040 space between two words.
20041 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20051 for units use the menu
20053 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20054 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20056 \begin_inset space ~
20064 arg "space-insert thin"
20070 \begin_layout Standard
20071 Here is an example to show the differences:
20074 \begin_layout Standard
20075 \begin_inset Tabular
20076 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20077 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20078 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20079 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20086 \begin_inset space ~
20090 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20102 space between number and unit
20109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20118 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20130 half space between number and unit
20143 \begin_layout Subsection
20145 \begin_inset Index idx
20148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20149 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20157 \begin_layout Standard
20158 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20160 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20161 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20162 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20163 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20164 These bits of text became known as
20175 \begin_layout Standard
20176 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20177 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20178 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20179 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20180 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20181 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20182 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20183 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20184 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20185 \begin_inset Newline newline
20193 \begin_inset Newline newline
20201 \begin_inset Newline newline
20204 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20205 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20206 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20208 \begin_inset space ~
20212 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20214 key "latexcompanion"
20220 \begin_inset space ~
20224 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20231 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20232 's page break mechanism.
20235 \begin_layout Chapter
20236 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20239 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20246 \begin_layout Standard
20247 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20250 \begin_inset space ~
20256 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20259 \begin_layout Section
20261 \begin_inset Index idx
20264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20271 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20280 \begin_layout Standard
20282 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20285 \begin_layout Description
20288 \begin_inset space ~
20291 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20292 \begin_inset Newline newline
20296 \begin_inset Note Note
20299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20300 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20308 \begin_layout Description
20309 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20310 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20311 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20314 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20315 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20317 \begin_inset space ~
20323 \begin_inset Newline newline
20327 \begin_inset Note Comment
20330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20331 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20340 \begin_layout Description
20342 \begin_inset space ~
20345 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20346 set in the document settings under
20348 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20350 \begin_inset space ~
20356 \begin_inset Newline newline
20360 \begin_inset Newline newline
20364 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20373 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20374 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20379 of a comment that appears in the output.
20385 \begin_inset Newline newline
20389 \begin_inset Newline newline
20392 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20395 \begin_layout Standard
20396 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20404 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20408 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20411 \begin_layout Section
20413 \begin_inset Index idx
20416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20423 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20425 name "sec:Footnotes"
20432 \begin_layout Standard
20434 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20437 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20440 or the toolbar button
20443 arg "footnote-insert"
20455 \begin_inset Graphics
20456 filename clipart/footnote.png
20465 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20466 's representation of your footnote.
20476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20495 label, the box will
20499 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20500 Clicking on the box label again will close
20513 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20514 and click on the footnote
20529 \begin_layout Standard
20530 Here is an example footnote:
20538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20539 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20547 \begin_layout Standard
20548 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20549 position where the footnote box is placed.
20550 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20551 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20552 according to the document class.
20554 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20555 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20561 ey are described in the
20564 \begin_inset space ~
20572 \begin_layout Section
20574 \begin_inset Index idx
20577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20584 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20586 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20593 \begin_layout Standard
20594 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20596 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20598 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20600 \begin_inset space ~
20605 or the toolbar button
20608 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20634 appearing within your text.
20635 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20636 's representation of your margin
20645 \begin_layout Standard
20646 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20650 \begin_inset Marginal
20653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20655 This is a marginal note.
20663 \begin_layout Standard
20664 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20665 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20666 pages, right on odd pages.
20669 \begin_layout Standard
20670 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20673 \begin_inset space ~
20681 \begin_inset space ~
20689 \begin_layout Section
20690 Graphics and Images
20691 \begin_inset Index idx
20694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20701 \begin_inset Index idx
20704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20711 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20713 name "sec:Graphics"
20720 \begin_layout Standard
20721 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20722 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20725 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20730 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20734 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20737 \begin_layout Standard
20738 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20743 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20744 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20746 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20747 \begin_inset space ~
20751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20753 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20760 \begin_layout Standard
20765 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20766 of the image in the output.
20767 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20771 \begin_inset space ~
20775 \begin_inset space ~
20784 \begin_inset space ~
20788 \begin_inset space ~
20792 \begin_inset space ~
20797 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20798 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20806 \begin_layout Standard
20810 \begin_inset space ~
20814 \begin_inset space ~
20819 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20820 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20822 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20827 \begin_inset space ~
20832 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20833 with the image size is printed.
20836 \begin_layout Standard
20837 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20838 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20840 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20843 \begin_layout Standard
20845 \begin_inset Graphics
20846 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20854 \begin_layout Standard
20855 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20856 the image into a float, see section
20857 \begin_inset space ~
20861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20863 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20870 \begin_layout Subsection
20872 \begin_inset Index idx
20875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20884 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20891 \begin_layout Standard
20892 You can insert images in any known file format.
20893 But as we explained in section
20894 \begin_inset space ~
20898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20900 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20904 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20906 therefore uses the program
20910 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20911 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20912 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20913 \begin_inset space ~
20917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20919 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20926 \begin_layout Standard
20927 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20930 \begin_layout Description
20932 \begin_inset space ~
20935 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20936 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20937 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20941 Graphics Interchange Format
20942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20945 (GIF, file extension
20946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20958 \begin_inset Index idx
20961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20993 Portable Network Graphics
20994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20997 (PNG, file extension
20998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21010 \begin_inset Index idx
21013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21045 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21049 (JPG, file extension
21050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21074 \begin_inset Index idx
21077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21108 \begin_layout Description
21110 \begin_inset space ~
21113 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21115 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21116 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21117 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21118 \begin_inset Newline newline
21121 Scalable image formats can be
21122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21125 Scalable Vector Graphics
21126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21129 (SVG, file extension
21130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21142 \begin_inset Index idx
21145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21177 Encapsulated PostScript
21178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21181 (EPS, file extension
21182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21194 \begin_inset Index idx
21197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21229 Portable Document Format
21230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21233 (PDF, file extension
21234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21246 \begin_inset Index idx
21249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21264 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21265 result will not be scalable.
21266 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21272 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21280 \begin_layout Standard
21281 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21288 \begin_layout Subsection
21289 Grouping of Image Settings
21290 \begin_inset Index idx
21293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21294 Images ! Settings grouping
21302 \begin_layout Standard
21303 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21305 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21306 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21308 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21309 need to manually change each of them.
21313 \begin_layout Standard
21314 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21317 \begin_inset space ~
21321 \begin_inset space ~
21333 \begin_inset space ~
21337 \begin_inset space ~
21343 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21344 and checking the name of the desired group.
21347 \begin_layout Section
21349 \begin_inset Index idx
21352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21359 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21368 \begin_layout Standard
21369 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21372 arg "tabular-insert"
21377 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21381 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21382 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21383 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21386 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21387 from the rest of the table.
21388 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21389 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21391 Here is an example table:
21394 \begin_layout Standard
21396 \begin_inset Tabular
21397 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21398 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21399 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21400 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21401 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21402 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21600 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
21604 \begin_layout Standard
21606 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
21607 This corresponds to the
21608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21615 table style listed in the style selection.
21618 \begin_layout Standard
21620 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
21621 Other available styles include:
21624 \begin_layout Itemize
21626 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
21628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21635 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
21639 \begin_layout Itemize
21641 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
21642 a border-less table with no lines at all,
21645 \begin_layout Itemize
21647 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
21649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21656 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
21657 bold top/bottom lines (see
21668 \begin_layout Standard
21670 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
21671 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
21672 button can be changed in
21674 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21675 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21679 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
21683 \begin_layout Subsection
21687 \begin_layout Standard
21688 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21691 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21695 This brings up the table dialog.
21696 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21697 cursor is placed currently.
21698 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21699 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21700 done on all of your selection.
21703 \begin_layout Standard
21704 In addition to the table dialog, the
21707 \begin_inset space ~
21712 helps you in setting table properties.
21713 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21716 \begin_layout Standard
21720 \begin_inset space ~
21725 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21726 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21727 current cell respectively.
21728 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21730 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21731 of text, see section
21732 \begin_inset space ~
21736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21738 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21745 \begin_layout Standard
21746 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21747 using the check box
21756 This will merge the cells to
21760 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21761 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21762 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21763 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21764 in the last row without the upper border:
21767 \begin_layout Standard
21769 \begin_inset Tabular
21770 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21771 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21772 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21773 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21774 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21775 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21786 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21795 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21871 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21906 \begin_layout Standard
21907 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21908 -arguments for the table.
21909 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21910 explained in the chapter
21917 \begin_inset space ~
21923 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21924 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21925 but are visible in the output.
21928 \begin_layout Standard
21929 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21937 Most DVI-viewers are
21941 able to display rotations.
21949 \begin_layout Standard
21954 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
21959 adds lines for all cell borders.
21962 \begin_layout Subsection
21964 \begin_inset Index idx
21967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21968 Tables ! Multi-page
21974 \begin_inset Index idx
21977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21986 \begin_layout Standard
21987 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
21990 \begin_inset space ~
21994 \begin_inset space ~
22002 \begin_inset space ~
22007 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22008 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22011 \begin_layout Description
22016 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22017 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22018 Except for the first page, if
22021 \begin_inset space ~
22029 \begin_layout Description
22033 \begin_inset space ~
22038 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22039 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22042 \begin_layout Description
22047 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22048 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22049 except for the last page, if
22052 \begin_inset space ~
22060 \begin_layout Description
22064 \begin_inset space ~
22069 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22070 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22073 \begin_layout Description
22074 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22075 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22077 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22081 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22084 \begin_inset space ~
22092 \begin_layout Standard
22093 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22094 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22095 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22101 In this context, first means first in this order:
22104 \begin_inset space ~
22116 \begin_inset space ~
22121 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22124 \begin_layout Standard
22126 \begin_inset Tabular
22127 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22128 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22129 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22130 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22131 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22132 <row endfirsthead="true">
22133 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22139 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22144 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22153 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22163 <row endfirsthead="true">
22164 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22175 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22184 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22196 <row endhead="true">
22197 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22208 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22217 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22227 <row endhead="true">
22228 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22239 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22248 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 <row endfoot="true">
22261 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22272 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22281 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22312 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23253 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23262 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23271 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23282 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23313 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23344 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23375 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23406 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23437 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23468 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23499 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23530 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23561 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23592 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23623 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23654 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23685 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23716 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23747 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23778 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23809 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23840 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23871 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23902 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23933 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23964 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23995 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24026 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24057 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24088 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24119 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24150 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24181 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24212 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24242 <row endlastfoot="true">
24243 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24254 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24263 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24280 \begin_layout Subsection
24282 \begin_inset Index idx
24285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24292 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24294 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24301 \begin_layout Standard
24302 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24303 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24304 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24305 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24309 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24312 \begin_layout Standard
24313 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24314 for the column in the table dialog.
24315 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24316 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24320 \begin_layout Standard
24322 \begin_inset Tabular
24323 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24324 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24325 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24326 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24327 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24347 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24416 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24472 This is longer now.
24477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24528 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24529 This is longer now.
24534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24560 \begin_layout Standard
24561 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24562 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24567 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24568 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24574 Selection with the mouse or with
24578 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24579 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24580 the selection from outside the table.
24583 \begin_layout Section
24585 \begin_inset Index idx
24588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24595 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24604 \begin_layout Subsection
24608 \begin_layout Standard
24609 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24610 have a fixed location.
24612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24619 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24627 \begin_inset space ~
24632 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24633 too many notes on the current page.
24636 \begin_layout Standard
24637 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24638 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24639 and pages without text.
24640 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24641 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24642 Floats are therefore numbered.
24643 Referencing is described in section
24644 \begin_inset space ~
24648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24650 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24657 \begin_layout Standard
24658 To insert a float, use the menu
24660 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24664 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24665 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24667 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24668 \begin_inset Index idx
24671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24677 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24678 paragraph within the float.
24679 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24680 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24681 left-clicking on the box label.
24682 A closed float box looks like this:
24683 \begin_inset Graphics
24684 filename clipart/float.png
24689 – a gray button with a red label.
24692 \begin_layout Standard
24693 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24695 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24698 \begin_layout Subsection
24700 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24702 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24707 \begin_inset Index idx
24710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24711 Floats ! Figure floats
24719 \begin_layout Standard
24721 \begin_inset space ~
24725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24727 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24731 was created using the menu
24733 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24734 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24740 arg "float-insert figure"
24744 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24747 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24753 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24757 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24758 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24760 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24762 \begin_inset space ~
24770 arg "layout-paragraph"
24776 \begin_layout Standard
24777 \begin_inset Float figure
24784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24786 \begin_inset Graphics
24787 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24797 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24802 name "fig:A-star-in"
24819 \begin_layout Standard
24820 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24821 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24823 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24832 ) and refer to it using the menu
24834 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24840 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24844 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24845 vague references like
24846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24853 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24854 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24864 For more about cross-references, see section
24865 \begin_inset space ~
24869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24871 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24878 \begin_layout Standard
24879 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24880 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24881 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24882 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24883 as described in section
24884 \begin_inset space ~
24888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24890 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24896 \begin_inset space ~
24900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24902 reference "fig:Two-images"
24906 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24907 You can also set the images one below the other.
24909 \begin_inset space ~
24913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24915 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24922 reference "fig:Star"
24926 are the subfigures.
24929 \begin_layout Standard
24930 \begin_inset Float figure
24937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24938 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24942 \begin_inset Float figure
24949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24950 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24955 name "fig:Undefinable"
24967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24968 \begin_inset Graphics
24969 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
24981 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24985 \begin_inset Float figure
24992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24993 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25011 \begin_inset Graphics
25012 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25024 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25031 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25034 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25036 name "fig:Two-images"
25053 \begin_layout Subsection
25055 \begin_inset Index idx
25058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25059 Floats ! Table floats
25067 \begin_layout Standard
25068 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25070 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25071 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25074 or the toolbar button
25077 arg "float-insert table"
25081 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25082 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25083 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25085 \begin_inset space ~
25089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25091 reference "tab:Table-float"
25098 \begin_layout Standard
25099 \begin_inset Float table
25106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25107 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25112 name "tab:Table-float"
25124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25126 \begin_inset Tabular
25127 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25128 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25129 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25130 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25131 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25258 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25279 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25282 \end{array}\right]$
25290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25303 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25324 \begin_layout Subsection
25326 \begin_inset Index idx
25329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25338 \begin_layout Standard
25340 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25341 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25342 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25344 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25352 \begin_inset space ~
25360 \begin_layout Section
25362 \begin_inset Index idx
25365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25374 \begin_layout Standard
25376 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25378 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25379 \begin_inset space \space{}
25386 \begin_layout Standard
25387 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25388 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25390 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25394 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25395 and its alignment within the page.
25398 \begin_layout Standard
25400 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25410 height_special "totalheight"
25415 backgroundcolor "none"
25418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25421 This is a minipage.
25422 The text is set in an italic style.
25425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25428 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25429 another formatting.
25437 \begin_layout Standard
25438 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25441 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25445 as described in section
25446 \begin_inset space ~
25450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25452 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25457 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25463 \begin_layout Standard
25464 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25474 height_special "totalheight"
25479 backgroundcolor "none"
25482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25483 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25484 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25490 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25494 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25504 height_special "totalheight"
25509 backgroundcolor "none"
25512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25513 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25514 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25522 \begin_layout Standard
25523 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25529 \begin_layout Standard
25530 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25532 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25539 \begin_inset space ~
25547 \begin_layout Chapter
25548 Mathematical Formulas
25549 \begin_inset Index idx
25552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25559 \begin_inset Index idx
25562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25591 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25593 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25600 \begin_layout Standard
25601 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25606 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25609 \begin_layout Section
25611 \begin_inset Index idx
25614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25623 \begin_layout Standard
25624 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25637 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25639 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25640 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25641 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25643 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25649 \begin_layout Standard
25650 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25654 \begin_inset space ~
25659 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25662 \begin_layout Standard
25663 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25664 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25667 \begin_layout Standard
25668 This is a line with an inline formula
25669 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25675 \begin_layout Standard
25676 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25677 paragraph, like this one:
25678 \begin_inset Formula
25685 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25688 \begin_layout Standard
25690 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25692 For example, typing
25693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25706 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25707 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25711 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25714 \begin_inset space ~
25722 \begin_layout Subsection
25723 Navigating in Formulas
25724 \begin_inset Index idx
25727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25736 \begin_layout Standard
25737 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25738 achieved with the arrow keys.
25740 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25741 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25746 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25747 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25751 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25755 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25758 \end{array}\right]$
25766 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25771 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25772 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25775 \begin_layout Standard
25780 , printed in this document as
25781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25785 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25792 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25793 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25794 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25799 For example, if you want
25800 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25808 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25818 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25822 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25827 , since in the latter case only the
25830 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25835 will be under the square root sign:
25836 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25842 \begin_layout Standard
25843 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25845 \begin_inset Formula
25847 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25856 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25857 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25860 \begin_layout Subsection
25864 \begin_layout Standard
25865 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25866 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25870 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25871 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25872 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25873 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25874 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25878 \begin_layout Subsection
25879 Exponents and Subscripts
25880 \begin_inset Index idx
25883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25890 \begin_inset Index idx
25893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25902 \begin_layout Standard
25903 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25906 arg "math-superscript"
25912 arg "math-subscript"
25915 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25917 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25920 , type in a formula
25923 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25933 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25939 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25943 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25949 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25955 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
25957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25964 , you have to use an extra
25968 to separate the circumflex and the character.
25969 For example, if you want
25970 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
25976 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25982 Subscripts are similar: To get
25983 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
25989 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25997 \begin_layout Subsection
25999 \begin_inset Index idx
26002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26011 \begin_layout Standard
26012 Create a fraction either with the command
26018 or by using the icon
26021 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26027 \begin_inset space ~
26033 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26034 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26035 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26040 To move back up, press
26045 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26046 \begin_inset Formula
26048 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26051 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26059 \begin_layout Subsection
26061 \begin_inset Index idx
26064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26073 \begin_layout Standard
26074 Roots can be created using the
26077 \begin_inset space ~
26085 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26091 arg "math-insert \\root"
26113 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26119 always produces a square root.
26122 \begin_layout Subsection
26123 Operators with Limits
26124 \begin_inset Index idx
26127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26134 \begin_inset Index idx
26137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26146 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26153 \begin_layout Standard
26155 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26159 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26162 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26163 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26164 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26165 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26166 The sum operator will automatically place its
26167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26174 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26176 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26180 \begin_inset Formula
26182 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26187 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26191 \begin_layout Standard
26192 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26194 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26195 behind the operator and using the menu
26197 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26198 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26200 \begin_inset space ~
26204 \begin_inset space ~
26218 \begin_layout Standard
26219 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26228 \begin_inset Index idx
26231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26238 \begin_inset Formula
26240 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26245 which will place the
26246 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26258 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26259 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26265 \begin_layout Standard
26266 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26273 Have a look at section
26274 \begin_inset space ~
26278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26280 reference "subsec:Functions"
26284 for an explanation of function macros.
26287 \begin_layout Subsection
26289 \begin_inset Index idx
26292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26301 \begin_layout Standard
26302 Most math symbols can be found in the
26305 \begin_inset space ~
26310 under one of several categories; including
26327 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26331 \begin_layout Standard
26332 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26333 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26334 don't have to use the
26337 \begin_inset space ~
26342 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26344 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26347 \begin_layout Subsection
26349 \begin_inset Index idx
26352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26361 \begin_layout Standard
26362 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26368 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26374 \begin_inset space ~
26382 arg "math-insert \\space"
26386 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26387 For example, the sequence
26392 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26395 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26397 \begin_inset Graphics
26398 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26403 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26404 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26405 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26406 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26407 , because they are negative
26409 Here are two examples:
26412 \begin_layout Standard
26422 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26428 \begin_layout Standard
26438 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26444 \begin_layout Subsection
26446 \begin_inset Index idx
26449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26456 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26458 name "subsec:Functions"
26465 \begin_layout Standard
26469 \begin_inset space ~
26474 contains under the button
26477 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26480 a number of function macros, such as
26481 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26485 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26493 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26500 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26501 avoid confusions, because
26502 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26506 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26512 \begin_layout Standard
26513 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26515 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26519 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26525 \begin_layout Standard
26526 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26527 are placed, as described in section
26528 \begin_inset space ~
26532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26534 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26541 \begin_layout Subsection
26543 \begin_inset Index idx
26546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26555 \begin_layout Standard
26556 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26558 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26559 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26560 commands, for example, to enter
26561 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26564 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26565 Our example is entered by typing
26570 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26577 \begin_inset space ~
26581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26583 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26587 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26590 \begin_layout Standard
26591 \begin_inset Float table
26598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26599 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26604 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26608 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26618 \begin_inset Tabular
26619 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26620 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26621 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26622 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26623 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26707 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26761 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26815 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26869 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26923 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26977 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
26987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27031 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27085 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27139 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27184 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27205 \begin_layout Standard
27206 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27209 \begin_inset space ~
27217 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27220 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27224 \begin_layout Section
27225 Brackets and Delimiters
27226 \begin_inset Index idx
27229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27236 \begin_inset Index idx
27239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27246 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27248 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27255 \begin_layout Standard
27256 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27258 For some purposes, using just the keys
27263 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27264 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27265 toolbar delimiter icon
27268 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27272 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27273 \begin_inset Formula
27275 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27283 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27284 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27288 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27291 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27297 \begin_inset Formula
27299 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27307 \begin_layout Standard
27308 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27309 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27313 \begin_layout Standard
27314 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27315 left side and right side.
27316 If you use the option
27319 \begin_inset space ~
27324 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27325 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27327 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27332 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27333 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27336 \begin_layout Standard
27337 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27338 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27339 is to go inside the brackets.
27340 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27345 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27346 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27347 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27351 arg "math-delim ( )"
27357 \begin_layout Section
27358 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27359 \begin_inset Index idx
27362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27369 \begin_inset Index idx
27372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27379 \begin_inset Index idx
27382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27383 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27391 \begin_layout Standard
27392 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27396 \begin_inset space ~
27404 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27408 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27409 Here is an example:
27410 \begin_inset Formula
27412 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27421 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27422 \begin_inset space ~
27426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27428 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27433 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27434 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27435 This alignment is set in the box
27440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27489 for every column as default.
27490 For example, the sequence
27491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27502 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27503 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27504 corresponds to the relevant column.
27505 The result will look like this:
27506 \begin_inset Formula
27509 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27510 column & has & has\,right\\
27511 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27520 \begin_layout Standard
27521 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27524 arg "newline-insert newline"
27527 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27528 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27530 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27533 or the math toolbar.
27536 \begin_layout Standard
27537 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27538 It can be created with the menu
27540 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27541 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27543 \begin_inset space ~
27555 Here is an example:
27556 \begin_inset Formula
27570 \begin_layout Standard
27571 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27574 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27577 arg "newline-insert newline"
27581 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27586 arg "newline-insert newline"
27589 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27597 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27598 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27599 A new row is created by every further entry of
27602 arg "newline-insert newline"
27606 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27607 Here is an example:
27608 \begin_inset Formula
27610 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27611 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27616 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27617 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27618 \begin_inset Formula
27620 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27628 \begin_layout Standard
27629 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27636 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27637 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27640 reference "eq:asquared"
27645 The other types are described in section
27646 \begin_inset space ~
27650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27652 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27659 \begin_layout Section
27660 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27661 \begin_inset Index idx
27664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27665 Math ! Formula numbering
27671 \begin_inset Index idx
27674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27675 Math ! Referencing formulas
27681 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27683 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27690 \begin_layout Standard
27691 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27693 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27694 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27696 \begin_inset space ~
27700 \begin_inset space ~
27708 arg "math-number-toggle"
27712 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27713 within parentheses.
27714 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27715 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27716 the document class.
27717 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27718 separated by a dot:
27719 \begin_inset Formula
27729 arg "math-number-toggle"
27732 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27733 You can only number displayed formulas.
27736 \begin_layout Standard
27737 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27739 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27740 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27742 \begin_inset space ~
27746 \begin_inset space ~
27754 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27757 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27758 \begin_inset Formula
27761 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27767 To number all lines use the shortcut
27770 arg "math-number-toggle"
27776 \begin_layout Standard
27777 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27780 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27781 A label is inserted with the menu
27783 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27792 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27793 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27794 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27806 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27807 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27808 We inserted in the following example the label
27809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27816 in the second line:
27817 \begin_inset Formula
27819 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27820 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27825 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27826 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27827 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27829 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27831 \begin_inset space ~
27839 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27843 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27844 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27845 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27846 as the formula number:
27849 \begin_layout Standard
27850 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27853 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27860 \begin_layout Standard
27861 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27862 's cross-reference box are described in section
27863 \begin_inset space ~
27867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27869 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27874 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27882 \begin_layout Section
27883 User defined math macros
27884 \begin_inset Index idx
27887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27896 \begin_layout Standard
27898 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27899 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27900 Math macros are explained in section
27903 \begin_inset space ~
27915 \begin_layout Section
27919 \begin_layout Subsection
27921 \begin_inset Index idx
27924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27933 \begin_layout Standard
27934 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27935 To set a font in a formula, use the
27938 \begin_inset space ~
27946 arg "math-insert \\font"
27949 , or enter its command, listed in table
27950 \begin_inset space ~
27954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27956 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27963 \begin_layout Standard
27964 \begin_inset Float table
27971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27972 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27977 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27981 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
27989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27991 \begin_inset Tabular
27992 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
27993 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27994 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27995 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28027 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28054 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28081 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28114 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28141 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28168 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28202 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28229 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28263 \begin_layout Standard
28264 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28272 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28288 \begin_layout Standard
28289 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28290 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28295 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28296 space when you need a space in the box.
28297 Here is an example where
28298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28309 denotes the set of numbers:
28310 \begin_inset Formula
28312 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28320 \begin_layout Standard
28321 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28322 You can, for example, put a character in
28331 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28335 \begin_inset Newline newline
28338 So it is better not to use this feature.
28341 \begin_layout Standard
28342 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28343 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28347 \begin_inset Newline newline
28350 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28356 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28357 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28363 \begin_layout Standard
28370 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28373 \begin_layout Standard
28374 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28376 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28377 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28379 \begin_inset space ~
28387 \begin_layout Subsection
28389 \begin_inset Index idx
28392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28401 \begin_layout Standard
28402 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28404 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28408 \begin_inset space ~
28412 \begin_inset space ~
28420 \begin_inset space ~
28428 arg "math-insert \\font"
28432 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28433 in black instead of blue.
28434 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28435 Here is an example:
28436 \begin_inset Formula
28439 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28440 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28449 \begin_layout Subsection
28451 \begin_inset Index idx
28454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28463 \begin_layout Standard
28464 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28465 automatically chosen in most situations.
28483 For most characters,
28491 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28492 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28497 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28498 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28499 thinks are appropriate.
28500 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28503 arg "math-insert \\style"
28507 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28508 For example, you can set
28509 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28512 , which is normally in
28521 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28525 The four styles are used in the following example:
28528 \begin_layout Standard
28529 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28533 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28537 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28541 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28547 \begin_layout Standard
28548 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28549 is set in a particular size with the menu
28551 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28553 \begin_inset space ~
28558 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28559 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28560 will be adjusted to correspond.
28561 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28572 \begin_layout Standard
28576 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28582 \begin_layout Section
28583 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28585 \begin_inset Index idx
28588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28595 \begin_inset Index idx
28598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28607 \begin_layout Standard
28609 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28610 that are in common use.
28613 \begin_layout Subsection
28614 Enabling AMS-Support
28617 \begin_layout Standard
28618 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28619 the document by selecting the checkbox
28622 \begin_inset space ~
28626 \begin_inset space ~
28630 \begin_inset space ~
28637 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28641 \begin_inset Index idx
28644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28645 Document ! Settings
28653 \begin_inset space ~
28659 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28660 -errors in formulas,
28661 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28664 \begin_layout Subsection
28666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28668 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28673 \begin_inset Index idx
28676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28677 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28685 \begin_layout Standard
28686 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28687 provides a selection of different formula types.
28689 allows you to choose between
28710 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28711 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28718 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28721 \begin_layout Chapter
28725 \begin_layout Section
28727 \begin_inset Index idx
28730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28739 name "sec:Cross-References"
28746 \begin_layout Standard
28747 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28748 's strengths is cross-references.
28749 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28751 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28752 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28753 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28756 \begin_layout Enumerate
28760 \begin_layout Enumerate
28761 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28763 name "enu:Second-item"
28770 \begin_layout Enumerate
28774 \begin_layout Standard
28775 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28777 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28780 or by pressing the toolbar button
28787 A gray label box like this:
28788 \begin_inset Graphics
28789 filename clipart/label.png
28793 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28795 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28830 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28831 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28847 \begin_layout Standard
28848 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28850 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28853 or the toolbar button
28856 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28860 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28861 \begin_inset Graphics
28862 filename clipart/reference.png
28866 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28868 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28881 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28885 \begin_layout Standard
28886 As an alternative to
28888 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28891 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28896 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28897 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28899 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28911 \begin_layout Standard
28912 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28913 \begin_inset space ~
28917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28919 reference "enu:Second-item"
28926 \begin_layout Standard
28927 It is recommended to use a protected space
28931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28932 described in section
28933 \begin_inset space ~
28937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28939 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28948 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28949 line breaks between them.
28952 \begin_layout Standard
28953 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28956 \begin_layout Description
28957 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
28958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28960 reference "fig:Two-images"
28967 \begin_layout Description
28968 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
28969 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
28971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28981 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28988 \begin_layout Description
28989 <page>: prints the page number: Page
28990 \begin_inset space ~
28994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28995 LatexCommand pageref
28996 reference "fig:Two-images"
29003 \begin_layout Description
29005 \begin_inset space ~
29009 \begin_inset space ~
29012 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29014 LatexCommand vpageref
29015 reference "fig:Two-images"
29020 \begin_inset Newline newline
29023 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29024 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29025 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29026 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29027 it prints “on the next page”.
29028 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29031 \begin_layout Description
29033 \begin_inset space ~
29037 \begin_inset space ~
29041 \begin_inset space ~
29044 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29047 reference "fig:Two-images"
29052 \begin_inset Newline newline
29055 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29061 ; otherwise it behaves like
29065 \begin_inset space ~
29069 \begin_inset space ~
29078 \begin_layout Description
29080 \begin_inset space ~
29083 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29084 \begin_inset Newline newline
29088 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29096 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29106 \begin_inset Index idx
29109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29111 packages ! prettyref
29117 \begin_inset Index idx
29120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29122 packages ! refstyle
29133 \begin_inset Newline newline
29136 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29137 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29140 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29145 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29153 is the default and preferred because
29157 supports only English documents.
29158 The format is specified by using the command
29170 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29171 preamble of the document.
29172 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29190 \begin_inset Newline newline
29197 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29202 \begin_inset Newline newline
29213 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29214 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29216 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29217 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29222 , you might do so as follows:
29223 \begin_inset Newline newline
29230 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29235 \begin_inset Newline newline
29238 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29239 the package documentation
29240 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29242 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29248 \begin_inset Newline newline
29259 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29266 \begin_layout Description
29268 \begin_inset space ~
29271 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29273 LatexCommand nameref
29274 reference "fig:Two-images"
29281 \begin_layout Description
29283 \begin_inset space ~
29286 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29287 label for the reference:
29288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29289 LatexCommand labelonly
29290 reference "fig:Two-images"
29295 \begin_inset Newline newline
29298 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29299 Code, if you want to issue a command
29300 that \SpecialChar LyX
29306 , then you may want to use the
29309 \begin_inset space ~
29314 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29324 This is the form needed for e.
29325 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29329 \begin_inset space \space{}
29336 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29337 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29339 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29343 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29347 \begin_layout Standard
29348 You can only use the style
29352 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29356 is always possible.
29359 \begin_layout Standard
29360 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29361 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29363 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29364 \begin_inset space ~
29368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29370 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29377 \begin_layout Standard
29378 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29382 \begin_inset space ~
29386 \begin_inset space ~
29391 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29392 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29395 \begin_inset space ~
29400 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29401 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29404 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29410 \begin_layout Standard
29411 You can change labels at any time.
29412 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29413 do not need to think about this.
29416 \begin_layout Standard
29417 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29419 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29423 \begin_layout Standard
29424 References are described in detail in the section
29425 \begin_inset space ~
29435 \begin_inset space ~
29443 \begin_layout Section
29444 Table of Contents and other Listings
29445 \begin_inset Index idx
29448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29455 \begin_inset Index idx
29458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29459 Navigating ! Outline
29465 \begin_inset Index idx
29468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29484 \begin_layout Subsection
29486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29488 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29495 \begin_layout Standard
29496 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29498 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29499 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
29501 \begin_inset space ~
29505 \begin_inset space ~
29511 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29513 If you click on it, the
29517 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29518 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29519 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29521 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29523 \begin_inset space ~
29528 that is described in section
29529 \begin_inset space ~
29533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29535 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29542 \begin_layout Standard
29543 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29544 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29546 \begin_inset space ~
29550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29552 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29556 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29558 \begin_inset space ~
29562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29564 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29568 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29570 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29573 \begin_layout Subsection
29574 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29577 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29584 \begin_layout Standard
29585 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29587 You can insert them via the
29589 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29590 List/Contents/References
29593 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29596 \begin_layout Section
29597 URLs and Hyperlinks
29598 \begin_inset Index idx
29601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29608 \begin_inset Index idx
29611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29620 \begin_layout Subsection
29622 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29631 \begin_layout Standard
29632 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29634 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29640 \begin_layout Standard
29641 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29643 \begin_inset Flex URL
29646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29648 https://www.lyx.org
29656 \begin_layout Standard
29657 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29663 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29667 \begin_layout Standard
29668 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29676 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29685 \begin_layout Subsection
29687 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29689 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29696 \begin_layout Standard
29697 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29699 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29702 or with the toolbar button
29709 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29718 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29719 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29720 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29722 name "LyX's homepage"
29723 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29728 , an Email address like this:
29729 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29731 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29732 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29738 , or a link to a file.
29743 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29751 \begin_layout Standard
29752 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29765 to the link target.
29768 \begin_layout Standard
29769 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29770 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29771 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29772 the text style dialog.
29773 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29777 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29779 name "LyX's homepage"
29780 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29788 \begin_layout Standard
29789 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29793 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29795 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29796 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29800 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29802 \begin_inset Newline newline
29810 \begin_inset Newline newline
29817 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29820 \begin_layout Section
29822 \begin_inset Index idx
29825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29834 name "sec:Appendices"
29841 \begin_layout Standard
29842 Appendices are created with the menu
29844 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29846 \begin_inset space ~
29850 \begin_inset space ~
29856 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29857 as the appendix part of the book.
29858 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29861 \begin_layout Standard
29862 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29863 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
29864 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
29865 and the subsection number.
29866 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
29870 \begin_layout Standard
29872 \begin_inset space ~
29876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29878 reference "chap:Credits"
29883 \begin_inset space ~
29887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29889 reference "subsec:Export"
29896 \begin_layout Section
29898 \begin_inset Index idx
29901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29908 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29910 name "sec:Bibliography"
29917 \begin_layout Standard
29918 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
29920 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
29921 \begin_inset space ~
29925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29927 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29934 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
29939 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
29940 \begin_inset space ~
29944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29946 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
29951 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
29952 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
29953 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
29957 using a bibliography database.
29960 \begin_layout Standard
29961 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
29962 use two bibliographies in this document, a
29966 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
29967 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29968 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29969 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
29970 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
29973 \begin_layout Subsection
29974 The Bibliography Environment
29975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29977 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29984 \begin_layout Standard
29989 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
29991 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30000 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30002 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30003 of ASCII characters only.
30007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30009 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30012 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30018 \begin_inset Newline newline
30022 \begin_inset Flex URL
30025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30027 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30037 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30047 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30048 \begin_inset Newline newline
30055 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30056 the number of the entry.
30061 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30070 \begin_layout Standard
30071 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30073 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30076 or the toolbar button
30079 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30083 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30084 containing the available citations.
30085 Select one or more keys from the list and
30095 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30096 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30100 \begin_layout Standard
30101 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30102 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30103 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30115 \begin_layout Standard
30119 Companion Second Edition
30122 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30124 key "latexcompanion"
30132 \begin_layout Standard
30133 The \SpecialChar LyX
30134 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30135 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30145 \begin_layout Standard
30146 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30153 \begin_inset Index idx
30156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30165 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30166 the label needs to be given the form
30167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30178 Author A and Author B(Year)
30179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30186 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30193 \begin_inset space ~
30198 in the document settings
30199 \begin_inset Index idx
30202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30203 Document ! Settings
30210 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30212 \begin_inset space ~
30218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30220 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30228 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30230 Once you have done that, the
30234 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30251 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30252 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30253 These two are madatory.
30254 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30257 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30259 ) and in abrreviated form (
30266 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
30267 add the abbreviated form to
30271 and the full list to the optional
30279 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
30280 If specified like this,
30282 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
30283 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
30286 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30293 is specified, toggling
30294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30301 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
30302 full and abbreviated list
30306 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
30307 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
30308 the citation references.
30309 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
30314 \begin_layout Standard
30315 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30318 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30320 \begin_inset space ~
30328 arg "layout-paragraph"
30332 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
30335 \begin_layout Subsection
30336 Bibliography databases
30337 \begin_inset Index idx
30340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30341 Bibliography ! Databases
30347 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30349 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30356 \begin_layout Standard
30357 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
30362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30363 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
30365 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
30366 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
30371 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
30373 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
30374 your working field in a database.
30375 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
30376 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
30377 list for that document.
30378 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
30382 \begin_layout Standard
30383 The database is a text file with the file extension
30384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30395 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30396 The format is explained in
30397 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30404 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30406 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30408 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30414 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30415 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30416 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30418 \begin_inset Flex URL
30421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30423 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30431 \begin_layout Standard
30433 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30434 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30435 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30437 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30439 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30440 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30441 Those are addressed by
30446 \begin_inset Index idx
30449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30451 packages ! biblatex
30457 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30458 (although it has been significantly
30459 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30469 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30470 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30471 might conversely fail to correctly
30472 handle databases that use specific
30481 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30485 \begin_layout Standard
30486 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30491 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30493 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30497 \begin_inset Index idx
30500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30501 Document ! Settings
30513 \begin_inset space ~
30518 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30526 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30527 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30529 \begin_inset Index idx
30532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30533 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30542 \begin_layout Standard
30543 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30547 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30549 \begin_inset space ~
30555 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30556 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30564 Add bibliography to TOC
30566 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30571 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30572 in the document or just the cited references.
30574 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
30579 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
30580 differ from the encoding of the document.
30585 \begin_layout Standard
30586 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30587 style file is a text file with the file extension
30588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30599 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30600 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30601 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30602 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30604 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30610 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30611 \begin_inset Newline newline
30615 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30617 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30627 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30632 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30636 \begin_layout Standard
30637 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30640 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30642 \begin_inset Index idx
30645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30646 Bibliography ! Biblatex
30652 \begin_inset Index idx
30655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30657 packages ! biblatex
30665 \begin_layout Standard
30666 Accessing a database via
30670 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30673 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30674 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30676 \begin_inset space ~
30682 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30683 you cannot select a
30688 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
30692 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30695 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
30696 As for the styles, note the following.
30701 \begin_layout Standard
30706 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30719 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30720 file (text file with the file extension
30721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30732 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30733 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30735 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30739 \begin_layout Standard
30744 styles are not set in the
30747 \begin_inset space ~
30752 dialog, but in the document settings.
30753 \begin_inset Index idx
30756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30757 Document ! Settings
30762 However, in the dialog in the
30766 field, which is only visible if you use
30770 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30771 example how its heading will appear).
30772 These options are described in detail in the
30777 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30787 \begin_layout Standard
30788 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30789 \begin_inset space ~
30793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30795 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30805 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30806 Bibliography Processors
30809 \begin_layout Standard
30810 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30811 uses a bibliography processor,
30812 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30813 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30814 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30816 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30817 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30820 \begin_layout Standard
30821 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30823 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30824 You can do this on a general level in
30826 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30827 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30828 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30831 or for individual documents in
30833 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30834 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30838 The following variants are available by default:
30841 \begin_layout Description
30842 biber a specific, modern processor
30843 \begin_inset Index idx
30846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30853 developed exclusively for
30857 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30863 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
30868 makes use of; if you use the
30872 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
30879 \begin_layout Description
30880 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
30881 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
30882 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
30886 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
30889 \begin_layout Description
30890 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
30891 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
30895 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
30899 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
30903 features are supported.
30906 \begin_layout Standard
30907 By default (with the
30913 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30914 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30927 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30928 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30929 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30932 ), \SpecialChar LyX
30933 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
30946 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30947 -based bibliography styles).
30948 This should suit most needs.
30951 \begin_layout Standard
30952 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
30953 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
30954 (in \SpecialChar LyX
30959 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30960 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
30961 You can adjust it in
30963 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30964 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30965 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30971 \begin_layout Standard
30972 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
30973 can add below the selection.
30974 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
30975 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30981 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30991 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30995 \begin_layout Standard
30997 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
30999 These are explained in detail in section
31001 Customizing Bibliographies
31005 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31010 Additional Features
31015 \begin_layout Subsection
31017 \begin_inset Index idx
31020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31021 Bibliography ! Citation format
31027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31029 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31036 \begin_layout Standard
31037 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31038 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31042 \begin_inset space \space{}
31045 numerical citation (as
31046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31053 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31061 ) or author-year citations (as
31062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31071 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31075 \begin_layout Standard
31076 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31079 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31080 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31084 \begin_inset Index idx
31087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31088 Document ! Settings
31093 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31099 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31100 labels, is there to use
31103 \begin_inset space ~
31114 \begin_inset space ~
31119 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31122 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31129 \begin_layout Standard
31130 With a bibliography database (see
31131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31133 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31140 ) one has in contrary to the
31144 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31145 These style formats are available:
31148 \begin_layout Description
31150 \begin_inset space ~
31153 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31154 -based approached without any additional packages
31155 (simple numeric citations).
31158 \begin_layout Description
31159 Biblatex loads the package
31164 \begin_inset Index idx
31167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31169 packages ! biblatex
31174 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31176 Biblatex citation style
31180 Biblatex bibliography style
31183 Options to the package
31187 can be entered in the
31194 \begin_layout Description
31196 \begin_inset space ~
31200 \begin_inset space ~
31203 mode) loads the package
31207 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31208 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31220 behavior very closely.
31225 this option has some additional styles.
31230 styles are also supported by this variant.
31233 \begin_layout Description
31235 \begin_inset space ~
31238 (BibTeX) loads the package
31243 \begin_inset Index idx
31246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31253 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31256 \begin_layout Description
31258 \begin_inset space ~
31261 (BibTeX) loads the package
31266 \begin_inset Index idx
31269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31276 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
31279 \begin_layout Standard
31288 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
31290 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
31299 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
31301 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
31302 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
31304 Biblatex citation style
31307 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
31313 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
31317 \begin_layout Standard
31318 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
31319 are available in the
31324 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
31325 a name prefix such as
31326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31341 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
31342 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31346 \begin_inset space \space{}
31350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31361 \begin_layout Standard
31362 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31364 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31368 \begin_inset space \space{}
31371 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31377 \begin_inset space \space{}
31381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31393 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31397 \begin_inset space ~
31405 \begin_inset space ~
31411 Here is a simple example where the text
31412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31416 \begin_inset space ~
31420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31423 appears after the reference:
31426 \begin_layout Quote
31428 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31431 key "latexcompanion"
31439 \begin_layout Standard
31440 All styles except for
31444 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31454 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31458 \begin_layout Standard
31459 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31460 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31461 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31466 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31467 multi-citation (so-called
31468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31471 qualified citation lists
31472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31478 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31483 dialog will display three columns in the field
31490 \begin_inset space ~
31498 \begin_inset space ~
31506 \begin_inset space ~
31512 If you double-click on an item's
31515 \begin_inset space ~
31523 \begin_inset space ~
31528 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31531 General text before
31537 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31540 \begin_layout Section
31542 \begin_inset Index idx
31545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31561 \begin_layout Standard
31562 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31564 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31566 \begin_inset space ~
31571 or the toolbar button
31578 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31579 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31580 by \SpecialChar LyX
31581 as the index entry.
31584 \begin_layout Standard
31585 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31587 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31588 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31590 \begin_inset space ~
31596 A light blue box labeled
31597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31608 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31609 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31613 \begin_layout Standard
31614 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31615 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31616 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31617 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31619 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31621 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31629 \begin_layout Subsection
31630 Grouping Index Entries
31631 \begin_inset Index idx
31634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31643 \begin_layout Standard
31644 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31646 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31647 lists under the entry
31648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31656 First we create the entry
31657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31665 \begin_inset space ~
31669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31671 reference "subsec:Lists"
31676 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31677 \begin_inset space ~
31681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31683 reference "sec:Itemize"
31687 , we insert the command
31690 \begin_layout Standard
31696 \begin_layout Standard
31700 \begin_layout Standard
31706 \begin_layout Standard
31707 for the enumerated list in section
31708 \begin_inset space ~
31712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31714 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31721 \begin_layout Standard
31722 The exclamation mark
31723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31730 marks the grouping levels.
31731 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31732 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31733 If we don't have an index entry for
31734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31741 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31744 \begin_layout Subsection
31746 \begin_inset Index idx
31749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31750 Index ! Page ranges
31758 \begin_layout Standard
31759 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31761 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31762 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31763 an index entry in section
31764 \begin_inset space ~
31768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31770 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31777 \begin_layout Standard
31780 Paragraph environments|(
31783 \begin_layout Standard
31784 and another entry at the end of section
31785 \begin_inset space ~
31789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31791 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31798 \begin_layout Standard
31801 Paragraph environments|)
31804 \begin_layout Standard
31806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31829 respectively start and end the index range.
31830 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31831 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31832 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31833 An example is the index entry
31834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31837 Document ! Settings
31838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31844 \begin_layout Subsection
31846 \begin_inset Index idx
31849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31850 Index ! Cross referencing
31858 \begin_layout Standard
31859 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31860 We referred for example in the index entry
31861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31869 \begin_inset space ~
31873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31875 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
31879 ) to the index entry
31880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31887 in the same section using the entry
31890 \begin_layout Standard
31893 GIF|see{Image formats}
31896 \begin_layout Standard
31897 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31899 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
31900 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
31903 \begin_layout Subsection
31905 \begin_inset Index idx
31908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31909 Index ! Entry order
31917 \begin_layout Standard
31918 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
31919 follow the rules for the index order.
31920 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
31925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31926 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
31928 \begin_inset space ~
31932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31934 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31943 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
31944 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
31945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31969 \begin_inset Index idx
31972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31973 Dummy entries ! maïs
31979 \begin_inset Index idx
31982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31983 Dummy entries ! maître
31989 \begin_inset Index idx
31992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31993 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
31998 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
31999 maïs, maison, maître.
32000 To achieve this, we use the command
32003 \begin_layout Standard
32006 previous entry@current entry
32009 \begin_layout Standard
32010 In our case we want to have
32011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32026 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
32029 \begin_layout Standard
32035 \begin_layout Standard
32036 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
32037 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
32039 See the next subsection for an example.
32042 \begin_layout Subsection
32044 \begin_inset Index idx
32047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32048 Index ! Entry layout
32056 \begin_layout Standard
32057 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
32058 \begin_inset Index idx
32061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32064 This is an italic dummy entry
32069 You can also format the page number using the character
32070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32077 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32078 -command without a backslash.
32079 We can write for example
32082 \begin_layout Standard
32085 italic page number:|textit
32088 \begin_layout Standard
32089 to get the page number in italic.
32090 \begin_inset Index idx
32093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32094 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
32099 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
32100 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
32102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32118 \begin_inset space ~
32124 Have a look at section
32125 \begin_inset space ~
32129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32131 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32135 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32139 \begin_layout Standard
32140 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32148 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
32152 to generate the index, see section
32153 \begin_inset space ~
32157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32159 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32168 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
32173 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
32174 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32177 key "latexcompanion"
32190 \begin_layout Standard
32191 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
32193 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
32194 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
32195 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
32196 If so, put the following in the preamble
32199 \begin_layout Standard
32211 \begin_layout Standard
32215 \begin_layout Standard
32221 \begin_layout Standard
32222 in the index entry.
32223 \begin_inset Index idx
32226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32227 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
32232 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
32233 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
32234 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
32237 \begin_layout Standard
32238 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
32239 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
32240 a bold font for all index entries.
32241 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
32253 documentation for details,
32254 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32256 key "makeindex,xindy"
32264 \begin_layout Subsection
32266 \begin_inset Index idx
32269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32276 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32278 name "subsec:Index-Program"
32285 \begin_layout Standard
32286 If the index generation program
32290 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
32291 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
32295 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32296 distribution, is used.
32300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32305 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
32306 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
32307 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
32308 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
32309 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
32319 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
32321 dialog, see section
32322 \begin_inset space ~
32326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32328 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32333 The available options are listed and explained in
32334 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32336 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
32342 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
32346 \begin_layout Standard
32347 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
32348 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
32351 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32352 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32356 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
32357 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
32360 \begin_layout Subsection
32364 \begin_layout Standard
32365 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32366 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32374 next to the standard index.
32376 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32377 that add this feature.
32384 \begin_inset Index idx
32387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32389 packages ! splitidx
32394 package to generate multiple indexes.
32395 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32401 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32403 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32411 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32412 style, but it also includes
32413 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32414 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32422 \begin_layout Standard
32423 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32424 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32426 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32427 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32430 and select the option
32432 Use multiple Indexes
32439 already contains the standard index
32440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32448 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32449 also appear as a heading) to the
32453 input field and press the
32458 The new index now also appears in the list.
32459 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32460 label color to the new index.
32463 \begin_layout Standard
32464 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32467 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32468 List/Contents/References
32474 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32475 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32476 are additional features:
32479 \begin_layout Itemize
32480 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32481 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32484 \begin_layout Itemize
32485 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32486 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32491 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32492 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32493 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32494 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32497 \begin_layout Itemize
32502 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32503 code in the name of the index.
32506 \begin_layout Section
32507 Nomenclature/Glossary
32508 \begin_inset Index idx
32511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32518 \begin_inset Index idx
32521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32552 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32559 \begin_layout Standard
32560 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32561 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32562 called nomenclature or glossary.
32565 \begin_layout Standard
32566 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32573 \begin_inset Index idx
32576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32584 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32586 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32593 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32597 \begin_layout Standard
32598 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32599 and then use the menu
32601 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32607 \begin_inset space ~
32612 or the toolbar button
32615 arg "nomencl-insert"
32620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32631 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32634 \begin_layout Standard
32635 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32636 The first is the term or
32640 that you wish to define.
32645 of the term or symbol.
32648 \begin_layout Standard
32649 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32657 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32658 code for nomenclature entries the option
32662 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32670 \begin_layout Subsection
32671 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
32672 \begin_inset Index idx
32675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32676 Nomenclature ! Layout
32684 \begin_layout Standard
32685 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32689 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32696 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32704 \begin_inset Newline newline
32712 \begin_inset Newline newline
32718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32725 character starts/ends the formula.
32726 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32727 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32739 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32749 \begin_layout Standard
32750 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32751 syntax is given in section
32752 \begin_inset space ~
32756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32758 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32765 \begin_layout Standard
32769 \begin_inset space ~
32774 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32776 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32781 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32788 in this document is:
32789 \begin_inset Newline newline
32794 dummy entry for the character
32799 \begin_inset Newline newline
32811 \begin_inset space ~
32821 font use the command
32850 \begin_layout Standard
32851 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32852 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32856 \begin_inset space \space{}
32860 \begin_inset Newline newline
32876 \begin_inset Newline newline
32879 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
32880 This command will make the font of all symbols
32887 \begin_inset space ~
32895 \begin_layout Standard
32896 If the characters |
32897 \begin_inset space \space{}
32901 \begin_inset space \space{}
32905 \begin_inset space \space{}
32909 \begin_inset space \space{}
32913 \begin_inset space \space{}
32916 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
32917 code they need to be escaped
32918 by adding a quote character in front of them.
32919 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32920 LatexCommand nomenclature
32921 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
32922 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
32930 \begin_layout Subsection
32931 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
32932 \begin_inset Index idx
32935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32936 Nomenclature ! Sort order
32944 \begin_layout Standard
32945 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32946 -code of the symbol
32948 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
32950 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
32953 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32954 LatexCommand nomenclature
32956 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
32964 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32968 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32969 LatexCommand nomenclature
32972 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
32978 They will be sorted by
32979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33005 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33008 will be sorted before the
33012 since the character
33013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33020 is considered in sorting.
33023 \begin_layout Standard
33024 To control the sort order, you can edit the
33027 \begin_inset space ~
33032 field of the nomenclature dialog.
33033 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
33035 For the example given, you can insert
33039 in this field for the
33040 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33047 will be located before
33048 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33054 \begin_layout Standard
33055 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
33060 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33070 \begin_layout Subsection
33071 Nomenclature Options
33072 \begin_inset Index idx
33075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33076 Nomenclature ! Options
33082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33084 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
33091 \begin_layout Standard
33096 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
33097 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
33100 \begin_layout Description
33101 refeq Appends the phrase
33102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33117 to every nomenclature entry, where
33123 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
33126 \begin_layout Description
33127 refpage Appends the phrase
33128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33143 to every nomenclature entry, where
33149 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
33152 \begin_layout Description
33153 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
33156 \begin_layout Standard
33157 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
33158 class options list in the
33160 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33164 In this document the options
33171 \begin_layout Standard
33172 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33178 \begin_layout Standard
33179 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
33180 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
33185 field in the nomenclature dialog:
33188 \begin_layout Description
33198 \begin_layout Description
33201 nomrefpage Like the
33208 \begin_layout Description
33211 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
33220 \begin_layout Description
33224 \begin_inset space ~
33230 \begin_inset space ~
33235 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
33238 \begin_layout Standard
33240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33247 are automatically translated for most document languages.
33248 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
33252 \begin_layout Standard
33261 \begin_inset Newline newline
33267 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33271 \begin_inset space ~
33283 unskip, see equation
33286 \begin_inset Newline newline
33293 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33294 \begin_inset Newline newline
33300 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33304 \begin_inset space ~
33321 \begin_layout Standard
33322 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
33325 \begin_inset space ~
33330 in the document settings under
33333 \begin_inset space ~
33341 \begin_layout Standard
33349 \begin_inset Newline newline
33353 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33357 \begin_inset space ~
33369 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33371 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33372 \begin_inset Newline newline
33379 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33380 \begin_inset Newline newline
33384 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33388 \begin_inset space ~
33400 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33405 \begin_layout Subsection
33406 Printing the Nomenclature
33407 \begin_inset Index idx
33410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33411 Nomenclature ! Printing
33419 \begin_layout Standard
33420 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33422 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33423 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33439 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33440 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33441 You can choose between these settings:
33444 \begin_layout Description
33445 Default a space of 1
33446 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33452 \begin_layout Description
33454 \begin_inset space ~
33458 \begin_inset space ~
33461 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33464 \begin_layout Description
33465 Custom custom space
33468 \begin_layout Standard
33469 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33478 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33486 For example, in order to change the name to
33490 , add the following line to the preamble:
33493 \begin_layout Standard
33506 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33509 \begin_layout Standard
33510 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33511 \begin_inset Newline newline
33526 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33529 \begin_layout Subsection
33530 Nomenclature Program
33531 \begin_inset Index idx
33534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33535 Nomenclature ! Program
33541 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33543 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33550 \begin_layout Standard
33556 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33557 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33559 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33564 by adding options, see section
33565 \begin_inset space ~
33569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33571 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33576 The available options are listed and explained in
33577 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33579 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33587 \begin_layout Section
33589 \begin_inset Index idx
33592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33599 \begin_inset Index idx
33602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33603 Document ! Branches
33609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33611 name "sec:Branches"
33618 \begin_layout Standard
33619 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33620 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33621 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33622 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33625 \begin_layout Standard
33626 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33627 allows you to put text into branches.
33628 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33629 To create a branch, either select the menu
33631 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33632 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33635 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33637 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33644 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33645 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33646 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33647 and whether the name of the branch should
33648 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33649 (see below for an example).
33650 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33651 to the name of the other) and to add
33652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33660 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33664 \begin_inset space ~
33667 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33668 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33671 \begin_layout Standard
33672 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33673 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33675 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33678 where you can choose a branch.
33679 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33683 \begin_layout Standard
33684 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33685 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33688 \begin_layout Standard
33689 \begin_inset Branch Question
33693 \begin_layout Standard
33698 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
33706 \begin_layout Standard
33707 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33711 \begin_layout Standard
33716 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
33724 \begin_layout Standard
33731 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33732 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33735 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33736 Consider for example a file
33737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33744 which has the above branches.
33746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33753 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33777 branch were inactive,
33778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33793 branch was active, likewise
33794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33809 branch was active, and
33810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33813 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33817 if both branches were active.
33818 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33819 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33825 \begin_layout Standard
33826 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33832 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33833 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33837 \begin_inset space ~
33845 \begin_layout Standard
33846 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33850 \begin_layout Standard
33856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33863 branch is deactivated.
33869 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33875 \begin_layout Standard
33876 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
33877 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
33878 definitions for each branch.
33879 For example you can define for the question branch
33883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33884 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33885 -syntax, see section
33886 \begin_inset space ~
33890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33892 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33904 \begin_layout Standard
33914 \begin_layout Standard
33924 \begin_layout Standard
33925 and for the answer branch
33928 \begin_layout Standard
33938 \begin_layout Standard
33948 \begin_layout Standard
33949 \begin_inset Branch Question
33953 \begin_layout Standard
33957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33985 \begin_layout Standard
33986 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33990 \begin_layout Standard
33994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34022 \begin_layout Standard
34023 Now it is possible to use the
34027 question{\SpecialChar ldots
34034 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
34037 commands to obtain conditional output.
34038 Here is an example formula where only the
34045 \begin_inset Formula
34047 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
34055 \begin_layout Standard
34056 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
34064 \begin_layout Standard
34065 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
34067 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34071 \begin_inset space \space{}
34074 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
34076 For this advanced usage, see the
34082 Flex insets and InsetLayout
34087 \begin_layout Section
34089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34091 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
34096 \begin_inset Index idx
34099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34108 \begin_layout Standard
34111 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34112 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34115 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
34117 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34123 \begin_inset Index idx
34126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34128 packages ! hyperref
34133 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34134 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34135 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34136 part of the document.
34140 \begin_layout Standard
34141 The header information in the dialog tab
34145 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
34146 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
34147 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
34148 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
34152 \begin_inset space ~
34156 \begin_inset space ~
34161 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
34162 tries to extract the header information from your document title
34163 and author entries.
34167 \begin_inset space ~
34171 \begin_inset space ~
34175 \begin_inset space ~
34180 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
34183 \begin_layout Standard
34184 You can specify in the dialog tab
34188 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
34193 \begin_inset space ~
34197 \begin_inset space ~
34201 \begin_inset space ~
34206 option allows long links to be split;
34209 \begin_inset space ~
34213 \begin_inset space ~
34217 \begin_inset space ~
34225 \begin_inset space ~
34230 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
34233 \begin_inset space ~
34238 colors the different links.
34239 The default colors are:
34242 \begin_layout Labeling
34243 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34248 for hyperlinks and URLs
34251 \begin_layout Labeling
34252 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34260 \begin_layout Labeling
34261 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34269 \begin_layout Standard
34270 but you can change these in the field
34275 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
34278 \begin_layout Standard
34281 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
34284 \begin_layout Standard
34289 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
34290 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
34291 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
34294 \begin_layout Standard
34299 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
34300 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
34301 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
34311 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
34312 when opening the PDF.
34314 \begin_inset space ~
34317 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
34318 \begin_inset space ~
34321 1 will only display the sections.
34324 \begin_layout Standard
34325 PDF properties are also used in this document.
34326 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
34332 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
34333 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34343 \begin_layout Section
34345 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34347 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34349 name "sec:TeX-Code"
34356 \begin_layout Subsection
34359 \begin_inset Index idx
34362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34372 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34379 \begin_layout Standard
34380 As \SpecialChar LyX
34381 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34382 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34383 commands and constructs,
34386 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34387 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34388 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34389 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34390 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34391 cannot support all packages and
34395 \begin_layout Standard
34396 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34397 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34398 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34402 Code box is created by the menu
34404 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34406 \begin_inset space ~
34411 or by the toolbar button
34424 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34432 \begin_layout Standard
34433 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34435 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34437 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34442 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34447 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34454 , you can write the command part
34460 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34461 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34465 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34466 Code box behind the word.
34467 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34468 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34472 \begin_layout Standard
34473 \begin_inset Graphics
34474 filename clipart/ERT.png
34482 \begin_layout Standard
34486 \begin_layout Standard
34487 This is a line with a
34491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34514 \begin_layout Standard
34515 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34523 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34524 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34525 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34526 know that the command is finished.
34534 \begin_layout Subsection
34535 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34537 \begin_inset Argument 1
34540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34541 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34548 \begin_inset Index idx
34551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34559 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34561 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34568 \begin_layout Standard
34569 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34570 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34571 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34572 uses in the background.
34573 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34574 is based on commands, you can
34575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34583 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34584 any time if you know the right commands.
34585 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34586 is the end of the day.
34587 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34588 all caption labels bold.
34589 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34591 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34595 \begin_layout Standard
34596 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34598 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34600 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34603 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34613 \begin_layout Standard
34614 As result you find that the package
34619 \begin_inset Index idx
34622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34630 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34632 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34635 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34639 \begin_inset space ~
34647 \begin_layout Standard
34652 usepackage[options]{package name}
34655 \begin_layout Standard
34656 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34657 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34658 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34659 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34662 \begin_layout Standard
34663 In your case the package name is
34668 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34673 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34674 So you add the command
34677 \begin_layout Standard
34682 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34685 \begin_layout Standard
34686 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34691 For more commands provided by the
34695 package, have a look at its documentation,
34696 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34711 \begin_layout Standard
34712 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34714 For example if you use a
34718 class, you don't need the package
34722 , you can instead write
34725 \begin_layout Standard
34730 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34735 \begin_layout Standard
34736 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34737 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34738 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34745 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34748 \begin_layout Standard
34749 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34750 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34752 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34753 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34754 Code box as described in the previous
34758 \begin_layout Standard
34759 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34760 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34763 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34765 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34773 \begin_layout Standard
34774 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34780 \begin_layout Standard
34784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34794 \begin_inset Note Note
34797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34798 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34806 \begin_layout Left Header
34807 \begin_inset Argument 1
34810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34830 \begin_inset Note Note
34833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34834 defines the header line as described below
34842 \begin_layout Center Header
34843 \begin_inset Argument 1
34846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34855 \begin_layout Right Header
34856 \begin_inset Argument 1
34859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34880 \begin_layout Left Footer
34881 \begin_inset Argument 1
34884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34905 \begin_layout Center Footer
34906 \begin_inset Argument 1
34909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34921 \begin_inset Newline newline
34925 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34931 \begin_layout Right Footer
34932 \begin_inset Argument 1
34935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34957 \begin_layout Section
34958 Customized Page Headers and Footers
34959 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34961 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
34966 \begin_inset Index idx
34969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34970 Document ! Header/Footer line
34976 \begin_inset Index idx
34979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34988 \begin_layout Standard
34989 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
34993 \begin_inset space ~
35004 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35010 \begin_inset space ~
35016 As a second step add in the menu
35018 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35019 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35028 Custom Header/Footerlines
35031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35035 This module offers the following 6
35036 \begin_inset space ~
35042 \begin_layout Description
35044 \begin_inset space ~
35048 \begin_inset space ~
35052 \begin_inset space ~
35056 \begin_inset space ~
35060 \begin_inset space ~
35066 \begin_layout Description
35068 \begin_inset space ~
35072 \begin_inset space ~
35076 \begin_inset space ~
35080 \begin_inset space ~
35084 \begin_inset space ~
35090 \begin_layout Standard
35091 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35092 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35095 \begin_layout Standard
35096 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35097 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35099 \begin_inset space ~
35103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35105 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35109 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35112 \begin_layout Standard
35113 \begin_inset Float figure
35120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35123 \begin_inset Tabular
35124 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35125 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35126 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35127 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35128 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35130 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35148 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35159 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35177 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35188 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
35191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35192 The normal text on the page goes here.
35193 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
35195 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
35196 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
35201 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35210 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35221 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35239 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35250 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
35262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35268 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35286 \begin_inset Caption Standard
35288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35291 name "fig:Page-layout"
35295 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
35308 \begin_layout Standard
35309 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35317 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
35321 \begin_inset space ~
35326 is set to “Default”.
35327 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
35336 \begin_layout Subsection
35340 \begin_layout Standard
35341 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
35342 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
35343 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
35344 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
35346 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
35348 Defining the footer line works similarly.
35351 \begin_layout Standard
35352 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35353 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
35357 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35359 \begin_inset space ~
35367 \begin_layout Description
35370 thepage prints the current page number
35373 \begin_layout Description
35376 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
35379 \begin_layout Description
35382 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
35385 \begin_layout Description
35388 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35389 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35396 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35399 because it usually goes in a left header.
35402 \begin_layout Description
35405 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35406 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35408 It is normally used in the right header.
35411 \begin_layout Subsection
35412 Default header/footer
35415 \begin_layout Standard
35416 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35417 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35418 footer has the page number.
35419 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35420 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35421 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35424 \begin_inset space ~
35432 \begin_layout Subsection
35436 \begin_layout Standard
35437 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35438 Some pages are different.
35439 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35440 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35441 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35442 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35443 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35446 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35447 Header and footer decoration line
35450 \begin_layout Standard
35451 By default, you get a 0.4
35452 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35455 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35456 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35468 in the following way:
35471 \begin_layout Standard
35478 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35481 \begin_layout Standard
35482 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35495 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35502 \begin_layout Standard
35503 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35505 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35506 \begin_inset space ~
35510 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35520 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35521 Several header/footer lines
35524 \begin_layout Standard
35525 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35526 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35527 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35529 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35544 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35545 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35547 \begin_inset space ~
35555 \begin_layout Standard
35562 headheight}{height}
35565 \begin_layout Standard
35570 is a size in standard units (e.
35571 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35575 \begin_inset space \space{}
35583 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35584 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35585 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35586 logfile with the menu
35588 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35590 \begin_inset space ~
35598 \begin_inset space ~
35603 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35608 \begin_inset Index idx
35611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35613 packages ! fancyhdr
35619 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35620 for your header/footer.
35623 \begin_layout Subsection
35627 \begin_layout Standard
35628 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35629 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35630 This example consists of the following definition:
35633 \begin_layout Description
35635 \begin_inset space ~
35644 , empty optional argument
35647 \begin_layout Description
35649 \begin_inset space ~
35652 Header empty, empty optional argument
35655 \begin_layout Description
35657 \begin_inset space ~
35666 in the optional argument
35669 \begin_layout Description
35671 \begin_inset space ~
35680 in the optional argument
35683 \begin_layout Description
35685 \begin_inset space ~
35698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35702 \begin_inset Newline newline
35706 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35713 in the optional argument
35716 \begin_layout Description
35718 \begin_inset space ~
35727 , empty optional argument
35730 \begin_layout Description
35733 headrulewidth set to 2
35734 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35740 \begin_layout Standard
35741 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35742 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35748 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35758 \begin_layout Standard
35759 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35765 \begin_layout Standard
35769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35773 pagestyle{headings}
35779 \begin_inset Note Note
35782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35783 switches back to page style with the default headings
35791 \begin_layout Section
35792 Previewing Snippets of your Document
35793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35795 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35800 \begin_inset Index idx
35803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35810 \begin_inset Index idx
35813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35822 \begin_layout Standard
35824 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35825 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35826 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35829 \begin_layout Subsection
35833 \begin_layout Standard
35834 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35840 \begin_inset Index idx
35843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35845 packages ! preview-latex
35850 (on some systems named simply
35855 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35857 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35864 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35866 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
35874 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
35875 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35876 -package are automatically
35877 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
35881 \begin_layout Subsection
35885 \begin_layout Standard
35886 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35887 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35889 activate the option
35892 \begin_inset space ~
35899 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35905 \begin_inset space ~
35909 \begin_inset space ~
35912 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
35919 \begin_inset space ~
35932 \begin_inset space ~
35937 is the multiplication factor for the size.
35940 \begin_layout Standard
35941 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35946 \begin_inset space ~
35954 \begin_inset space ~
35962 \begin_layout Standard
35963 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
35964 and when you finish
35968 \begin_layout Standard
35969 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35977 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
35978 generated by activating the option
35981 \begin_inset space ~
35987 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
35995 \begin_layout Subsection
35996 Selected document parts
35999 \begin_layout Standard
36000 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36001 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36002 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36003 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36005 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36007 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36011 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36012 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36013 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36016 \begin_layout Standard
36017 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36024 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36036 is explained in section
36038 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36043 \begin_inset space ~
36053 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36054 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36055 the final rotated boxes,
36056 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36057 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36059 Here is the result:
36062 \begin_layout Standard
36063 \begin_inset Preview
36065 \begin_layout Standard
36070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36074 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36080 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36090 height_special "totalheight"
36095 backgroundcolor "none"
36098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36123 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36129 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36151 \begin_layout Standard
36152 Previewing works also for colors.
36153 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36172 is explained in section
36179 \begin_inset space ~
36192 \begin_layout Standard
36193 \begin_inset Preview
36195 \begin_layout Standard
36199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36218 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
36223 This is text within a colored, framed box.
36227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36242 \begin_layout Standard
36243 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
36249 \begin_layout Standard
36250 If \SpecialChar LyX
36251 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
36252 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
36253 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
36254 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36255 packages in your document preamble that are required by
36256 the \SpecialChar TeX
36258 If \SpecialChar LyX
36259 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
36260 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
36262 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
36263 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
36264 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
36267 \begin_layout Subsection
36272 \begin_layout Standard
36273 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36274 source of the whole document or parts of it.
36277 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36279 \begin_inset space ~
36284 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36286 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
36288 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
36289 's main window, then only this selection
36290 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
36291 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
36292 the source view window.
36297 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
36298 ; but note that if you have
36299 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
36301 not just the one which is open at the time.
36304 \begin_layout Section
36305 Advanced Find and Replace
36306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36308 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36313 \begin_inset Index idx
36316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36323 \begin_inset Index idx
36326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36335 \begin_layout Subsection
36339 \begin_layout Standard
36340 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
36341 allows for searching of complex,
36342 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
36344 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
36345 The key-features are:
36348 \begin_layout Itemize
36349 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
36350 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
36351 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
36355 \begin_layout Itemize
36356 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
36357 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
36358 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
36359 a section heading will only be found within section headings
36362 \begin_layout Itemize
36363 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36364 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36365 outside of mathematics environments
36368 \begin_layout Itemize
36369 Search may be widened to a specific
36374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36378 \begin_inset space ~
36381 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36382 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36389 \begin_layout Itemize
36390 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36391 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36396 \begin_inset space ~
36399 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36402 \begin_layout Subsection
36406 \begin_layout Standard
36407 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36409 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36422 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36425 ) or the toolbar button
36428 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36434 Advanced Find and Replace
36439 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36443 \begin_layout Standard
36449 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36453 \begin_inset space ~
36458 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36461 arg "paragraph-break"
36465 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36466 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36470 arg "paragraph-break"
36473 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36477 searches backwards.
36480 \begin_layout Standard
36484 \begin_inset space ~
36489 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36498 \begin_inset space ~
36503 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36506 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36507 Searching for mathematics
36510 \begin_layout Standard
36511 Mathematical formulas, such as
36512 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36515 or something more complex like
36516 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36519 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36524 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36525 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36526 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36527 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36533 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36537 \begin_layout Standard
36538 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36539 This is done by switching to the
36543 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36548 This way, entering in the
36555 \begin_layout Itemize
36556 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36557 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36560 \begin_layout Itemize
36561 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36562 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36565 \begin_layout Itemize
36566 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36567 of it only within section headings.
36568 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36569 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36573 \begin_layout Itemize
36574 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36575 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36578 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36582 \begin_layout Standard
36583 The entries made in the
36587 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36590 \begin_inset space ~
36596 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36600 button or alternatively press
36603 arg "paragraph-break"
36610 while the cursor is in the
36613 \begin_inset space ~
36621 \begin_layout Standard
36622 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36624 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36628 \begin_layout Itemize
36629 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36630 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36638 with its typewriter version
36639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36653 \begin_layout Itemize
36654 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36660 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36672 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36679 (you may want to enable the
36682 \begin_inset space ~
36690 \begin_inset space ~
36695 options and disable the
36703 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36711 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36712 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36716 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36719 , or occurrences of
36720 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36724 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36730 \begin_layout Subsection
36734 \begin_layout Standard
36735 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36740 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36742 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36744 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36754 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36760 This is done with the context menu
36762 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36763 Insert Regular Expression
36765 while the cursor is in the
36770 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36771 expression matching rules
36775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36776 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36783 \begin_inset space ~
36786 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36787 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36793 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36794 same text in the document.
36795 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36796 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36799 \begin_layout Enumerate
36800 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36805 editor the fraction
36806 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36810 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36813 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36814 fractions with the given denominator.
36817 \begin_layout Enumerate
36818 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36830 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36835 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36836 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36837 Also, by inserting a
36838 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36841 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36842 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36845 \begin_layout Standard
36846 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36847 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36848 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36851 , and referring back to them through
36852 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36856 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36860 For example, try searching with the regexp
36861 \begin_inset Newline newline
36864 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
36867 \begin_inset Newline newline
36870 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
36873 \begin_layout Standard
36874 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
36877 \begin_layout Standard
36878 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36886 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
36887 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
36888 sub-expressions is absolute.
36890 \begin_inset space ~
36894 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36897 always refers to the first occurrence of
36898 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36901 in all entered regexps.
36909 \begin_layout Section
36911 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36913 name "sec:Spellchecking"
36918 \begin_inset Index idx
36921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36930 \begin_layout Standard
36932 has a built-in spell checker.
36935 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36942 key or the toolbar button
36945 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
36948 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
36949 beginning of the currently selected text.
36950 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
36951 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
36952 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
36953 scrolled so that it is visible.
36954 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
36955 n, if any could be found.
36956 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
36960 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
36961 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
36964 \begin_layout Standard
36965 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
36968 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36972 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
36973 a different one at the top of the dialog.
36975 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
36976 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
36979 \begin_inset space ~
36987 arg "dialog-show character"
36990 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
36992 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
36995 \begin_layout Standard
36996 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36997 can be downloaded from here:
36998 \begin_inset Newline newline
37002 \begin_inset Flex URL
37005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37007 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37013 \begin_inset Newline newline
37017 \begin_inset space ~
37020 files for each language.
37021 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37022 \begin_inset space ~
37025 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37026 's installation subfolder
37034 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37036 \begin_inset Newline newline
37039 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37040 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37041 but in most cases these are
37057 is the language code.
37060 \begin_layout Subsection
37064 \begin_layout Standard
37067 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37068 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37070 \begin_inset space ~
37073 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37076 you can set the following things:
37079 \begin_layout Description
37081 \begin_inset space ~
37084 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37085 should use for spell checking.
37086 Depending on your platform,
37096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37097 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37098 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37113 \begin_inset space ~
37116 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37119 \begin_layout Description
37121 \begin_inset space ~
37124 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37125 will always use the given language
37126 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37129 \begin_layout Description
37131 \begin_inset space ~
37134 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37140 \begin_inset space \space{}
37144 This should normally not be needed.
37147 \begin_layout Description
37149 \begin_inset space ~
37153 \begin_inset space ~
37156 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
37158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37168 \begin_layout Description
37170 \begin_inset space ~
37173 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
37174 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
37175 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
37176 appear in a context menu.
37177 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
37181 \begin_layout Description
37183 \begin_inset space ~
37187 \begin_inset space ~
37191 \begin_inset space ~
37194 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
37198 \begin_layout Section
37200 \begin_inset Index idx
37203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37210 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37212 name "sec:Thesaurus"
37219 \begin_layout Standard
37221 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
37222 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
37231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37232 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37234 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
37244 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
37246 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
37247 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
37248 which are available for many languages.
37251 \begin_layout Standard
37252 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
37253 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
37257 \begin_layout Subsection
37258 Setting up the thesaurus
37261 \begin_layout Standard
37270 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
37274 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
37279 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
37281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37285 \begin_inset space ~
37293 For instance, the US English files are named:
37296 \begin_layout Itemize
37300 \begin_layout Itemize
37304 \begin_layout Standard
37313 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
37314 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
37317 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37318 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37319 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37321 \begin_inset space ~
37326 ) to the path where they are installed.
37330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37331 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
37332 ies, typical locations are
37338 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
37342 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
37346 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
37349 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
37355 LibreOffice-<Version>
37362 On the Mac, the default location is
37364 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37365 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37366 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37367 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37368 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37369 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37377 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37378 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37379 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37383 \begin_layout Standard
37384 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37385 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37387 \begin_inset Newline newline
37391 \begin_inset Flex URL
37394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37396 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37404 \begin_layout Standard
37405 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37406 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37408 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37409 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37410 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37412 \begin_inset space ~
37417 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37419 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37420 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37424 \begin_layout Standard
37425 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37427 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37430 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37436 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37439 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37440 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37442 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37448 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37449 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37450 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37452 \begin_inset space ~
37457 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37460 \begin_layout Subsection
37461 Using the thesaurus
37464 \begin_layout Standard
37465 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37467 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37470 or the toolbar button
37473 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37476 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37478 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37480 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37481 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37482 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37491 ), related terms (such as
37494 \begin_inset space ~
37503 ), compounds (such as
37506 \begin_inset space ~
37515 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37524 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37527 \begin_layout Standard
37528 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37529 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37533 \begin_layout Standard
37534 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37535 the dictionary, such as the above
37539 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37544 \begin_inset space \space{}
37547 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37548 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37549 For example, looking up the word form
37553 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37558 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37559 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37563 \begin_inset space \space{}
37574 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37575 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37576 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37579 \begin_layout Section
37581 \begin_inset Index idx
37584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37591 \begin_inset Index idx
37594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37595 Document ! Change Tracking
37601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37603 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37610 \begin_layout Standard
37611 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37612 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37613 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37614 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37616 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37618 \begin_inset space ~
37621 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37623 \begin_inset space ~
37631 \begin_layout Standard
37632 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37646 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37647 You can change the color in
37649 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37650 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37652 \begin_inset space ~
37656 \begin_inset space ~
37661 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37667 \begin_inset Index idx
37670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37671 Color ! Change tracking
37676 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37677 's status bar when the
37678 cursor is in changed text.
37679 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37682 arg "changes-merge"
37688 \begin_layout Standard
37689 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37691 \begin_inset Index idx
37694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37703 \begin_layout Standard
37704 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37710 \begin_layout Standard
37711 \begin_inset Graphics
37712 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37720 \begin_layout Standard
37721 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37727 \begin_layout Standard
37728 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37731 \begin_layout Standard
37732 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37738 \begin_layout Standard
37739 \begin_inset Tabular
37740 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37741 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37742 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37743 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37744 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37753 arg "changes-track"
37761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37767 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37769 \begin_inset space ~
37772 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37774 \begin_inset space ~
37783 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37792 arg "changes-output"
37800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37806 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37808 \begin_inset space ~
37811 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37813 \begin_inset space ~
37817 \begin_inset space ~
37821 \begin_inset space ~
37830 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37851 Jumps to the next change
37857 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37866 arg "change-accept"
37874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37880 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37882 \begin_inset space ~
37885 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37887 \begin_inset space ~
37896 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37905 arg "change-reject"
37913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37919 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37921 \begin_inset space ~
37924 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37926 \begin_inset space ~
37935 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37944 arg "changes-merge"
37952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37958 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37960 \begin_inset space ~
37963 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37965 \begin_inset space ~
37974 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37983 arg "all-changes-accept"
37991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37997 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37999 \begin_inset space ~
38002 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38004 \begin_inset space ~
38008 \begin_inset space ~
38017 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38026 arg "all-changes-reject"
38034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38040 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38042 \begin_inset space ~
38045 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38047 \begin_inset space ~
38051 \begin_inset space ~
38060 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38083 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38084 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38086 \begin_inset space ~
38095 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38118 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38120 \begin_inset space ~
38136 \begin_layout Standard
38137 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38143 \begin_layout Standard
38144 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
38164 \begin_layout Standard
38165 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
38166 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
38167 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
38168 the next change after the current cursor position.
38169 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
38170 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
38171 step to the next change.
38172 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
38175 \begin_layout Standard
38176 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
38177 to describe a change.
38180 \begin_layout Standard
38181 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38187 \begin_inset Index idx
38190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38198 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38200 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38207 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38211 \begin_layout Section
38212 Comparison of Documents
38213 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38215 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38220 \begin_inset Index idx
38223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38224 Comparison of documents
38232 \begin_layout Standard
38233 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
38236 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38240 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
38241 file with change tracking enabled showing the
38243 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
38245 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
38249 \begin_inset space ~
38253 \begin_inset space ~
38257 \begin_inset space ~
38266 \begin_inset space ~
38270 \begin_inset space ~
38274 \begin_inset space ~
38278 \begin_inset space ~
38282 \begin_inset space ~
38286 \begin_inset space ~
38291 enables the change tracking option
38294 \begin_inset space ~
38298 \begin_inset space ~
38302 \begin_inset space ~
38307 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
38310 \begin_layout Section
38311 International Support
38312 \begin_inset Index idx
38315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38316 International support
38324 \begin_layout Standard
38325 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
38326 with any language you want.
38327 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
38328 up \SpecialChar LyX
38330 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38332 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
38340 \begin_layout Standard
38341 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
38342 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
38343 \begin_inset space ~
38347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38349 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
38356 \begin_layout Subsection
38358 \begin_inset Index idx
38361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38368 \begin_inset Index idx
38371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38372 Document ! Settings
38378 \begin_inset Index idx
38381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38382 Document ! Language
38390 \begin_layout Standard
38393 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38394 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38397 dialog lets you set
38399 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38404 \begin_layout Standard
38409 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38414 \begin_inset space ~
38419 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38420 For details about the different encoding options see section
38421 \begin_inset space ~
38425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38427 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38434 \begin_layout Subsection
38435 Keyboard mapping configuration
38436 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38438 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38445 \begin_layout Standard
38446 If you have for example a U.
38447 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38450 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38451 can use an alternate keymap.
38452 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38457 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38458 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38459 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38462 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38463 \begin_inset space ~
38467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38469 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38474 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38475 which one you want to use.
38478 \begin_layout Standard
38479 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38480 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38481 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38482 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38485 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38486 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38487 one to support the characters you want.
38488 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38495 \begin_layout Chapter
38498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38500 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38507 \begin_layout Standard
38508 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38509 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38510 topic inside the user's guide.
38513 \begin_layout Section
38515 \begin_inset Index idx
38518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38527 \begin_layout Standard
38532 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38535 \begin_layout Subsection
38539 \begin_layout Standard
38540 Creates a new document.
38543 \begin_layout Subsection
38547 \begin_layout Standard
38548 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38549 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38550 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38552 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
38553 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
38559 \begin_layout Subsection
38563 \begin_layout Standard
38567 \begin_layout Subsection
38571 \begin_layout Standard
38572 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38573 Click there on a file to open it.
38576 \begin_layout Subsection
38578 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
38582 \begin_layout Standard
38584 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
38585 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
38589 \begin_layout Subsection
38593 \begin_layout Standard
38594 Closes the current document.
38597 \begin_layout Subsection
38601 \begin_layout Standard
38602 Closes all opened documents.
38605 \begin_layout Subsection
38609 \begin_layout Standard
38610 Saves the actual document.
38613 \begin_layout Subsection
38617 \begin_layout Standard
38618 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38619 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
38623 \begin_layout Subsection
38625 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
38629 \begin_layout Standard
38631 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
38632 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
38638 \begin_layout Subsection
38642 \begin_layout Standard
38643 Saves all opened documents.
38646 \begin_layout Subsection
38650 \begin_layout Standard
38651 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38654 \begin_layout Subsection
38658 \begin_layout Standard
38659 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38660 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38661 It is described in the section
38663 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38668 Additional Features
38673 \begin_layout Subsection
38677 \begin_layout Standard
38678 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38679 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38681 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38682 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38686 \begin_layout Standard
38687 When using the menu entry
38690 \begin_inset space ~
38695 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38699 \begin_inset space ~
38703 \begin_inset space ~
38707 \begin_inset space ~
38712 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38713 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38716 \begin_layout Subsection
38718 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38720 name "subsec:Export"
38727 \begin_layout Standard
38728 You can export your document to various file formats.
38729 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38731 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38732 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38733 during its configuration.
38736 \begin_layout Standard
38737 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38739 \begin_inset space ~
38743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38745 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38752 \begin_layout Description
38758 \begin_inset space ~
38761 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
38763 \begin_inset space ~
38766 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38767 \begin_inset Newline newline
38770 Since \SpecialChar LyX
38771 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
38775 \begin_layout Description
38776 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38782 \begin_layout Description
38784 \begin_inset space ~
38787 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38793 \begin_layout Description
38794 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
38795 's native DVI-format.
38796 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38797 files paths or file names in your document.
38799 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38806 \begin_layout Description
38807 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
38808 in files paths or file names
38811 \begin_layout Description
38813 \begin_inset space ~
38820 ) DVI-format using the program
38822 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38825 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
38829 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38837 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
38845 \begin_layout Description
38847 \begin_inset space ~
38850 (cropped) the same as
38854 but with cropped page margins.
38857 \begin_layout Description
38859 \begin_inset space ~
38862 Dot text file with code in the programming language
38866 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
38871 \begin_layout Description
38875 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38883 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
38891 \begin_layout Description
38893 \begin_inset space ~
38897 \begin_inset space ~
38900 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
38904 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
38912 \begin_layout Description
38916 \begin_inset space ~
38925 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38926 source that is compilable with the program
38928 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38932 \begin_layout Description
38936 \begin_inset space ~
38941 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38942 source, additionally all images used in the document
38943 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
38947 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
38950 \begin_layout Description
38954 \begin_inset space ~
38959 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38960 source code, additionally all images used in the document
38961 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
38969 \begin_layout Description
38973 \begin_inset space ~
38982 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38983 source that is compilable with the program
38989 \begin_layout Description
38991 \begin_inset space ~
38995 \begin_inset space ~
39002 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39003 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39009 \begin_layout Description
39011 \begin_inset space ~
39014 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39015 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39017 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39021 \begin_inset space \space{}
39026 \begin_inset space ~
39030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39045 represent the version number)
39048 \begin_layout Description
39050 \begin_inset space ~
39054 \begin_inset space ~
39057 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39058 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39059 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39063 \begin_layout Description
39064 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39065 's internal XHTML engine
39068 \begin_layout Description
39070 \begin_inset space ~
39074 \begin_inset space ~
39078 \begin_inset space ~
39082 \begin_inset space ~
39085 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39090 For the conversion the program
39099 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39102 \begin_layout Description
39103 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39108 \begin_layout Description
39110 \begin_inset space ~
39113 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39115 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39118 For the conversion the program
39127 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39130 \begin_layout Description
39132 \begin_inset space ~
39135 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39136 For the conversion the program
39145 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39148 \begin_layout Description
39150 \begin_inset space ~
39153 (cropped) the same as
39156 \begin_inset space ~
39161 but with cropped page margins
39164 \begin_layout Description
39168 \begin_inset space ~
39173 PDF-format using the program
39177 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39180 \begin_layout Description
39184 \begin_inset space ~
39188 \begin_inset space ~
39196 \begin_inset space ~
39201 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
39202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39206 \begin_inset space \space{}
39209 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
39213 \begin_layout Description
39217 \begin_inset space ~
39222 PDF-format using the program
39224 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39227 , produces PDF-files directly
39230 \begin_layout Description
39234 \begin_inset space ~
39239 PDF-format using the program
39243 , produces PDF-files directly
39246 \begin_layout Description
39250 \begin_inset space ~
39255 PDF-format using the program
39259 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39262 \begin_layout Description
39266 \begin_inset space ~
39271 PDF-format using the program
39276 , produces PDF-files directly
39279 \begin_layout Description
39283 \begin_inset space ~
39291 \begin_layout Description
39295 \begin_inset space ~
39299 \begin_inset space ~
39304 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
39305 and then exported as text using the program
39310 \begin_layout Description
39315 PostScript format using the program
39323 options see section
39324 \begin_inset space ~
39328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39330 reference "subsec:General-output"
39337 \begin_layout Description
39338 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39339 source and also code in the statistical programming
39353 it is possible to use
39357 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
39361 \begin_layout Standard
39362 If one of the menu entries
39369 \begin_inset space ~
39378 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39380 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39382 \begin_inset space ~
39386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39388 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39393 \begin_inset Index idx
39396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39397 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39406 \begin_layout Subsection
39410 \begin_layout Standard
39411 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39412 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39415 \begin_inset space ~
39419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39421 reference "sec:Paths"
39426 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39435 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39436 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39437 's preferences as described in section
39438 \begin_inset space ~
39442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39444 reference "subsec:Converters"
39451 \begin_layout Subsection
39452 New and Close Window
39455 \begin_layout Standard
39456 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39460 \begin_layout Subsection
39464 \begin_layout Standard
39465 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39468 \begin_layout Section
39470 \begin_inset Index idx
39473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39482 \begin_layout Subsection
39486 \begin_layout Standard
39487 Described in section
39488 \begin_inset space ~
39492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39494 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39501 \begin_layout Subsection
39502 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39505 \begin_layout Standard
39506 Described in section
39507 \begin_inset space ~
39511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39513 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39520 \begin_layout Subsection
39524 \begin_layout Standard
39525 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39526 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39529 \begin_layout Subsection
39533 \begin_layout Standard
39534 Selects the whole document.
39537 \begin_layout Subsection
39538 Find & Replace (Quick)
39541 \begin_layout Standard
39542 Described in section
39543 \begin_inset space ~
39547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39549 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39556 \begin_layout Subsection
39557 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39560 \begin_layout Standard
39561 Described in section
39562 \begin_inset space ~
39566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39568 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39575 \begin_layout Subsection
39576 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39579 \begin_layout Standard
39580 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39584 \begin_layout Subsection
39586 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39590 \begin_layout Standard
39592 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39593 Described in section
39594 \begin_inset space ~
39598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39600 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39609 \begin_layout Subsection
39611 \begin_inset Index idx
39614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39615 Paragraph ! Settings
39623 \begin_layout Standard
39624 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39625 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39629 \begin_layout Standard
39630 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39631 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39637 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39638 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39640 \begin_inset space ~
39646 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
39650 \begin_layout Subsection
39652 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
39656 \begin_layout Standard
39658 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39659 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
39664 \begin_layout Enumerate
39666 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
39667 Customize text properties by means of the
39673 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
39676 ; this is described in section
39677 \begin_inset space ~
39681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39683 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39690 \begin_layout Enumerate
39692 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
39693 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
39695 Apply last settings
39698 \begin_layout Enumerate
39700 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39701 Change the casing of selected text (
39716 \begin_layout Subsection
39718 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
39722 \begin_layout Standard
39724 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
39725 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
39726 text styles (in the case of this document:
39748 \begin_inset space ~
39752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39754 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
39763 \begin_layout Subsection
39764 Table and Rows & Columns
39767 \begin_layout Standard
39768 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39769 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39770 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39773 \begin_layout Subsection
39777 \begin_layout Standard
39778 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39779 It will dissolve this inset.
39780 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39784 \begin_layout Subsection
39788 \begin_layout Standard
39789 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
39790 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
39793 \begin_layout Subsection
39794 Increase/Decrease List Depth
39797 \begin_layout Standard
39798 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
39800 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39801 \begin_inset space ~
39805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39807 reference "sec:Nesting"
39812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39814 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
39821 \begin_layout Section
39823 \begin_inset Index idx
39826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39835 \begin_layout Standard
39836 At the bottom of the
39840 menu the opened documents are listed.
39843 \begin_layout Subsection
39844 Open/Close all Insets
39847 \begin_layout Standard
39848 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
39851 \begin_layout Subsection
39852 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
39855 \begin_layout Standard
39856 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
39859 \begin_layout Standard
39860 Math macros are described in the
39867 \begin_layout Subsection
39871 \begin_layout Standard
39872 Shows the outline window as described in sections
39873 \begin_inset space ~
39877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39879 reference "sec:Navigating"
39884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39886 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
39893 \begin_layout Subsection
39897 \begin_layout Standard
39898 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
39900 \begin_inset space ~
39904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39906 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39913 \begin_layout Subsection
39917 \begin_layout Standard
39918 Opens a window showing console messages.
39919 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
39921 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39924 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
39925 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
39926 is processing the document.
39929 \begin_layout Subsection
39931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39933 name "subsec:Toolbars"
39938 \begin_inset Index idx
39941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39950 \begin_layout Standard
39951 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
39953 All toolbars and the
39956 \begin_inset space ~
39961 can be turned on and off.
39966 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
39978 \begin_inset space ~
39990 \begin_inset space ~
39995 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
39999 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40006 \begin_layout Standard
40011 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40015 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40016 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40017 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40018 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40019 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40022 \begin_layout Standard
40024 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40025 \begin_inset space ~
40029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40031 reference "sec:Toolbars"
40038 \begin_layout Subsection
40042 \begin_layout Standard
40046 \begin_inset space ~
40050 \begin_inset space ~
40054 \begin_inset space ~
40058 \begin_inset space ~
40062 \begin_inset space ~
40066 \begin_inset space ~
40071 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40072 's main window vertically while
40075 \begin_inset space ~
40079 \begin_inset space ~
40083 \begin_inset space ~
40087 \begin_inset space ~
40091 \begin_inset space ~
40095 \begin_inset space ~
40100 will split it horizontally.
40101 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40102 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40103 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40104 three or more documents at the same time.
40105 To close a split view, use the menu
40108 \begin_inset space ~
40112 \begin_inset space ~
40120 \begin_layout Subsection
40124 \begin_layout Standard
40125 Closes a split view.
40128 \begin_layout Subsection
40132 \begin_layout Standard
40133 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40134 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40135 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40136 's main window fullscreen.
40137 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40138 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
40141 \begin_layout Section
40143 \begin_inset Index idx
40146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40155 \begin_layout Subsection
40159 \begin_layout Standard
40160 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
40161 \begin_inset space ~
40165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40167 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
40178 \begin_layout Subsection
40180 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40182 name "subsec:Special-Character"
40189 \begin_layout Standard
40190 Here you can insert the following characters:
40193 \begin_layout Description
40198 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
40201 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
40202 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40203 -packages you have installed.
40204 You can get a complete display by checking
40207 \begin_inset space ~
40213 \begin_inset Newline newline
40217 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40225 Not all characters will be visible in the
40229 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
40230 dialog (see section
40231 \begin_inset space ~
40235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40237 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
40241 ) can display every character.
40249 \begin_layout Description
40250 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
40254 \begin_layout Description
40256 \begin_inset space ~
40260 \begin_inset space ~
40263 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
40264 \begin_inset space ~
40268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40270 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
40277 \begin_layout Description
40279 \begin_inset space ~
40282 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
40285 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40286 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40292 \begin_layout Description
40294 \begin_inset space ~
40297 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
40300 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40301 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40307 \begin_layout Description
40309 \begin_inset space ~
40312 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
40316 \begin_layout Description
40318 \begin_inset space ~
40321 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
40325 \begin_layout Description
40327 \begin_inset space ~
40330 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
40336 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40342 \begin_layout Description
40344 \begin_inset space ~
40347 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
40351 \begin_layout Description
40353 \begin_inset space ~
40357 \begin_inset Index idx
40360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40367 \begin_inset Index idx
40370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40371 Language ! Phonetic symbols
40376 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
40377 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
40379 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40385 \begin_inset Index idx
40388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40396 \begin_inset Newline newline
40399 More information about this feature can be found in the
40405 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40411 \begin_layout Description
40412 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40414 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40415 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40419 \begin_layout Subsection
40423 \begin_layout Standard
40424 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40427 \begin_layout Description
40428 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40429 \begin_inset script superscript
40431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40440 \begin_layout Description
40441 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40442 \begin_inset script subscript
40444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40453 \begin_layout Description
40455 \begin_inset space ~
40458 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40459 \begin_inset space ~
40463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40465 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40472 \begin_layout Description
40474 \begin_inset space ~
40477 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40478 \begin_inset space ~
40482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40484 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40491 \begin_layout Description
40493 \begin_inset space ~
40496 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40497 \begin_inset space ~
40501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40503 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40510 \begin_layout Description
40512 \begin_inset space ~
40515 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40517 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40521 \begin_inset space \space{}
40524 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40525 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40534 To insert a fraction use the command
40539 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40543 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40552 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40559 \begin_layout Description
40561 \begin_inset space ~
40564 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40565 \begin_inset space ~
40569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40571 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40578 \begin_layout Description
40580 \begin_inset space ~
40583 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40584 \begin_inset space ~
40588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40590 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40597 \begin_layout Description
40599 \begin_inset space ~
40602 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40603 \begin_inset space ~
40607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40609 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40616 \begin_layout Description
40617 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40618 \begin_inset space ~
40622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40624 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40631 \begin_layout Description
40633 \begin_inset space ~
40636 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40637 \begin_inset space ~
40641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40643 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40650 \begin_layout Description
40652 \begin_inset space ~
40655 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40656 \begin_inset space ~
40660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40662 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40669 \begin_layout Description
40671 \begin_inset space ~
40675 \begin_inset space ~
40678 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40681 \begin_inset space ~
40685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40687 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
40694 for a usage example.
40697 \begin_layout Description
40699 \begin_inset space ~
40703 \begin_inset space ~
40706 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
40707 \begin_inset space ~
40711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40713 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40720 \begin_layout Description
40722 \begin_inset space ~
40725 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
40726 as described in section
40727 \begin_inset space ~
40731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40733 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40740 \begin_layout Description
40742 \begin_inset space ~
40745 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
40746 \begin_inset space ~
40750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40752 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40759 \begin_layout Description
40761 \begin_inset space ~
40764 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
40765 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
40767 \begin_inset space ~
40771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40773 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40780 \begin_layout Description
40782 \begin_inset space ~
40785 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
40786 \begin_inset space ~
40790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40792 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40799 \begin_layout Description
40801 \begin_inset space ~
40805 \begin_inset space ~
40808 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
40809 \begin_inset space ~
40813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40815 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40822 \begin_layout Subsection
40824 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
40828 \begin_layout Standard
40830 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
40831 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
40832 The submenu allows you to insert
40835 \begin_layout Description
40837 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
40839 \begin_inset space ~
40842 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
40845 \begin_layout Description
40847 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
40849 \begin_inset space ~
40853 \begin_inset space ~
40856 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
40860 \begin_layout Description
40862 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
40864 \begin_inset space ~
40867 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
40870 \begin_layout Description
40872 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
40874 \begin_inset space ~
40877 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
40880 \begin_layout Description
40882 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
40884 \begin_inset space ~
40888 \begin_inset space ~
40891 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
40895 \begin_layout Description
40897 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
40899 \begin_inset space ~
40902 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
40905 \begin_layout Description
40907 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
40909 \begin_inset space ~
40913 \begin_inset space ~
40917 \begin_inset space ~
40920 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
40923 \begin_layout Description
40925 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
40927 \begin_inset space ~
40930 Name inserts the user name as specified in
40932 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40933 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40939 \begin_layout Description
40941 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
40943 \begin_inset space ~
40946 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
40948 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40949 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40955 \begin_layout Description
40957 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
40958 Other\SpecialChar ldots
40959 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
40960 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
40963 \begin_layout Subsection
40966 List/Contents/References
40969 \begin_layout Standard
40970 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
40974 \begin_inset space ~
40995 are described in section
40996 \begin_inset space ~
41000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41002 reference "sec:toc"
41011 is described in section
41012 \begin_inset space ~
41016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41018 reference "sec:Index"
41026 is described in section
41027 \begin_inset space ~
41031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41033 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41039 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41042 is described in section
41043 \begin_inset space ~
41047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41049 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41056 \begin_layout Subsection
41060 \begin_layout Standard
41061 To insert floats, as described in section
41062 \begin_inset space ~
41066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41068 reference "sec:Floats"
41072 and in detail the chapter
41079 \begin_inset space ~
41087 \begin_layout Subsection
41091 \begin_layout Standard
41092 To insert notes, described in section
41093 \begin_inset space ~
41097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41099 reference "sec:Notes"
41106 \begin_layout Subsection
41110 \begin_layout Standard
41111 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
41113 Branches are described in section
41114 \begin_inset space ~
41118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41120 reference "sec:Branches"
41127 \begin_layout Subsection
41131 \begin_layout Standard
41132 Inserts document class-specific insets.
41133 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
41135 An example is the document class
41136 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
41138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41146 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
41150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41155 with three custom insets.
41158 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41162 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
41168 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
41171 \begin_layout Subsection
41173 \begin_inset Index idx
41176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41185 \begin_layout Standard
41186 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
41188 For more information see chapter
41190 External Document Parts
41193 \begin_inset space ~
41199 \begin_layout Subsection
41201 \begin_inset Index idx
41204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41213 \begin_layout Standard
41214 Inserts a box in a certain style.
41215 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
41222 \begin_inset space ~
41230 \begin_layout Subsection
41234 \begin_layout Standard
41239 dialog as described in section
41240 \begin_inset space ~
41244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41246 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41253 \begin_layout Subsection
41257 \begin_layout Standard
41262 as described in section
41263 \begin_inset space ~
41267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41269 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41276 \begin_layout Subsection
41280 \begin_layout Standard
41285 as described in section
41286 \begin_inset space ~
41290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41292 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41299 \begin_layout Subsection
41301 \begin_inset Index idx
41304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41311 \begin_inset Index idx
41314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41315 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
41323 \begin_layout Standard
41324 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
41325 Floats are described in section
41326 \begin_inset space ~
41330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41332 reference "sec:Floats"
41336 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
41338 Multi-page Captions
41343 \begin_inset space ~
41351 \begin_layout Subsection
41355 \begin_layout Standard
41356 Inserts an index entry as described in section
41357 \begin_inset space ~
41361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41363 reference "sec:Index"
41370 \begin_layout Subsection
41374 \begin_layout Standard
41375 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
41376 \begin_inset space ~
41380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41382 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41389 \begin_layout Subsection
41393 \begin_layout Standard
41394 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
41395 Tables are described in section
41396 \begin_inset space ~
41400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41402 reference "sec:Tables"
41406 and in detail in the chapter
41413 \begin_inset space ~
41421 \begin_layout Subsection
41425 \begin_layout Standard
41431 Graphics are described in section
41432 \begin_inset space ~
41436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41438 reference "sec:Graphics"
41445 \begin_layout Subsection
41449 \begin_layout Standard
41450 Inserts a URL as described in section
41451 \begin_inset space ~
41455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41457 reference "subsec:URLs"
41464 \begin_layout Subsection
41468 \begin_layout Standard
41469 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41470 \begin_inset space ~
41474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41476 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41483 \begin_layout Subsection
41487 \begin_layout Standard
41488 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41489 \begin_inset space ~
41493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41495 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41502 \begin_layout Subsection
41506 \begin_layout Standard
41507 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41508 \begin_inset space ~
41512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41514 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41521 \begin_layout Subsection
41524 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
41527 \begin_layout Standard
41528 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41529 environments of the same type.
41531 \begin_inset space ~
41535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41537 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41541 for an explanation.
41544 \begin_layout Subsection
41548 \begin_layout Standard
41549 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
41550 title or caption of a float.
41551 Inserts a short title as described in section
41552 \begin_inset space ~
41556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41558 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
41565 \begin_layout Subsection
41570 \begin_layout Standard
41571 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
41572 Code box as described in section
41573 \begin_inset space ~
41577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41579 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
41586 \begin_layout Subsection
41588 \begin_inset Index idx
41591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41600 \begin_layout Standard
41601 Inserts a program listings box.
41602 Program listings are explained in the chapter
41604 Program Code Listings
41609 \begin_inset space ~
41617 \begin_layout Subsection
41619 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41623 \begin_layout Standard
41625 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41626 Inserts the actual date.
41627 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
41634 \begin_layout Subsection
41638 \begin_layout Standard
41639 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
41640 \begin_inset space ~
41644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41646 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41653 \begin_layout Section
41655 \begin_inset Index idx
41658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41667 \begin_layout Standard
41668 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
41669 \begin_inset space ~
41672 of the current document.
41673 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41676 \begin_layout Subsection
41680 \begin_layout Standard
41681 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41682 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41683 to jump, for example, between section
41684 \begin_inset space ~
41688 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41689 \begin_inset space ~
41692 2.5 and use the submenu
41695 \begin_inset space ~
41699 \begin_inset space ~
41706 \begin_inset space ~
41712 \begin_inset space ~
41716 \begin_inset space ~
41722 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41726 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41732 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41735 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41738 \begin_layout Standard
41739 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41743 \begin_inset space ~
41748 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41751 \begin_inset space ~
41756 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41759 \begin_layout Subsection
41760 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
41763 \begin_layout Standard
41764 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41768 \begin_layout Subsection
41772 \begin_layout Standard
41773 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
41774 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
41775 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
41779 \begin_inset space ~
41783 \begin_inset space ~
41791 \begin_layout Subsection
41795 \begin_layout Standard
41796 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
41799 The \SpecialChar LyX
41800 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
41802 \begin_inset space ~
41810 \begin_inset space ~
41815 manual for a detailed description.
41818 \begin_layout Section
41820 \begin_inset Index idx
41823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41832 \begin_layout Subsection
41836 \begin_layout Standard
41837 Change Tracking is described in section
41838 \begin_inset space ~
41842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41844 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41851 \begin_layout Subsection
41859 \begin_layout Standard
41860 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
41861 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
41862 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41864 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
41865 to the clipboard or update the view.
41866 \begin_inset Newline newline
41869 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41873 \begin_layout Standard
41876 Open Containing Directory
41878 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
41879 's temporary folder for the document.
41880 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
41881 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
41882 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
41883 For example some journals require to send the
41887 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41891 \begin_layout Subsection
41892 Start Appendix Here
41895 \begin_layout Standard
41896 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
41897 as described in section
41898 \begin_inset space ~
41902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41904 reference "sec:Appendices"
41911 \begin_layout Subsection
41913 \begin_inset space ~
41919 \begin_layout Standard
41920 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
41921 default output format for the document (menu
41923 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41924 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41925 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41927 \begin_inset space ~
41931 \begin_inset space ~
41937 \begin_inset space ~
41941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41943 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41947 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
41950 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41951 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41953 \begin_inset space ~
41956 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41958 \begin_inset space ~
41961 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41963 \begin_inset space ~
41967 \begin_inset space ~
41973 \begin_inset space ~
41977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41979 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41983 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
41984 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
41986 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41987 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41989 \begin_inset space ~
41992 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41994 \begin_inset space ~
41997 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42001 \begin_inset space ~
42005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42007 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42012 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42013 when it is first configured.
42014 The default output format is
42017 \begin_inset space ~
42025 \begin_layout Subsection
42026 View (Other Formats)
42029 \begin_layout Standard
42030 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
42031 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
42032 actual document with an external program.
42033 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
42034 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42035 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
42037 All possible formats are listed in section
42038 \begin_inset space ~
42042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42044 reference "subsec:Export"
42049 You should at least see the menu entry
42054 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42056 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42058 \begin_inset space ~
42062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42064 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42069 \begin_inset Index idx
42072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42073 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42082 \begin_layout Standard
42083 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
42084 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42086 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42087 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42089 \begin_inset space ~
42092 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42094 \begin_inset space ~
42097 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42101 \begin_inset space ~
42105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42107 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42112 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42113 when it is first configured.
42116 \begin_layout Subsection
42118 \begin_inset space ~
42124 \begin_layout Standard
42125 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
42126 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
42129 \begin_layout Subsection
42130 Update (Other Formats)
42133 \begin_layout Standard
42134 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
42135 your document without opening a new viewer window.
42138 \begin_layout Subsection
42139 View Master Document
42142 \begin_layout Standard
42143 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42159 \begin_inset space ~
42164 manual for more information on this topic).
42165 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
42166 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
42170 \begin_inset space ~
42174 \begin_inset space ~
42179 generates the output of the whole book, while
42183 will just output the chapter alone.
42186 \begin_layout Standard
42187 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42188 in the document settings (menu
42190 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42191 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42192 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42194 \begin_inset space ~
42198 \begin_inset space ~
42204 \begin_inset space ~
42208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42210 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42214 ) or in the preferences (menu
42216 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42217 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42219 \begin_inset space ~
42222 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42224 \begin_inset space ~
42227 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42229 \begin_inset space ~
42233 \begin_inset space ~
42239 \begin_inset space ~
42243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42245 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42252 \begin_layout Subsection
42253 Update Master Document
42256 \begin_layout Standard
42257 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42273 \begin_inset space ~
42278 manual for more information on this topic).
42279 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
42280 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
42283 \begin_layout Standard
42284 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42285 in the document settings (menu
42287 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42288 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42289 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42291 \begin_inset space ~
42295 \begin_inset space ~
42301 \begin_inset space ~
42305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42307 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42311 ) or in the preferences (menu
42313 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42314 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42316 \begin_inset space ~
42319 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42321 \begin_inset space ~
42324 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42326 \begin_inset space ~
42330 \begin_inset space ~
42336 \begin_inset space ~
42340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42342 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42349 \begin_layout Subsection
42351 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42353 name "subsec:Compressed"
42360 \begin_layout Standard
42361 Un/compresses the current document.
42362 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
42363 compression (see the
42365 Additional Features
42367 manual for details).
42370 \begin_layout Subsection
42374 \begin_layout Standard
42375 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
42378 \begin_layout Subsection
42382 \begin_layout Standard
42383 The document settings are described in appendix
42384 \begin_inset space ~
42388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42390 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42397 \begin_layout Section
42399 \begin_inset Index idx
42402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42411 \begin_layout Subsection
42415 \begin_layout Standard
42416 Spell checking is explained in section
42417 \begin_inset space ~
42421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42423 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42430 \begin_layout Subsection
42434 \begin_layout Standard
42435 The thesaurus is described in section
42436 \begin_inset space ~
42440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42442 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42449 \begin_layout Subsection
42451 \begin_inset Index idx
42454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42461 \begin_inset Index idx
42464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42473 \begin_layout Standard
42474 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42475 the highlighted document part.
42478 \begin_layout Subsection
42484 \begin_inset Index idx
42487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42488 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42497 \begin_layout Standard
42498 Generates with the help of the program
42500 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42503 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42504 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42505 This feature is not available on Windows.
42508 \begin_layout Subsection
42514 \begin_inset Index idx
42517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42527 \begin_layout Standard
42528 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42533 \begin_inset space ~
42538 to see the full filename paths.
42541 \begin_layout Subsection
42543 \begin_inset Index idx
42546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42555 \begin_layout Standard
42556 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
42557 files as described in section
42558 \begin_inset space ~
42562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42564 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42571 \begin_layout Subsection
42573 \begin_inset Index idx
42576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42589 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42607 \begin_inset Index idx
42610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42611 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42620 \begin_layout Standard
42621 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
42622 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
42623 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42624 -packages and programs it needs; see
42626 \begin_inset space ~
42630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42632 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42639 \begin_layout Subsection
42643 \begin_layout Standard
42648 dialog as described in detail in appendix
42649 \begin_inset space ~
42653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42655 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42662 \begin_layout Section
42664 \begin_inset Index idx
42667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42676 \begin_layout Standard
42677 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42678 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42680 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42684 \begin_layout Standard
42688 \begin_inset space ~
42693 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42694 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42695 packages and classes found
42696 by \SpecialChar LyX
42698 \begin_inset space ~
42702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42704 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42711 \begin_layout Standard
42715 \begin_inset space ~
42720 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42725 \begin_layout Section
42727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42729 name "sec:Toolbars"
42736 \begin_layout Standard
42737 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
42738 \begin_inset space ~
42742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42744 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
42751 \begin_layout Standard
42752 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
42753 This is described in the
42755 Additional Features
42760 \begin_layout Subsection
42762 \begin_inset Index idx
42765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42774 \begin_layout Standard
42775 \begin_inset Graphics
42776 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
42784 \begin_layout Standard
42785 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42791 \begin_layout Standard
42792 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42809 \begin_inset Note Note
42812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42813 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
42818 manual for more information.
42826 \begin_layout Standard
42827 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42833 \begin_layout Standard
42834 \begin_inset Tabular
42835 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
42836 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42837 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42838 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42844 \begin_inset Graphics
42845 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
42855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42859 pull-down box for the environments
42872 \begin_layout Standard
42873 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
42879 \begin_layout Standard
42881 \begin_inset Tabular
42882 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
42883 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42884 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42885 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42886 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42909 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42916 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42939 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42946 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42969 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42976 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42985 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
42993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42999 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43006 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43015 arg "spelling-continuously"
43023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43027 Spellcheck continuously
43033 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43056 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43063 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43086 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43093 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43116 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43123 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43146 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43153 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43176 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43178 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
43183 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43192 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43201 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
43209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43215 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43221 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43225 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43234 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43241 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
43249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43255 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43274 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43283 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
43291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43297 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43298 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
43305 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43326 Emphasize text, function of the
43327 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
43330 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43332 \begin_inset space ~
43335 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43337 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
43343 arg "dialog-show character"
43354 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43375 Set text to noun style, function of the
43376 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
43379 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43381 \begin_inset space ~
43384 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43386 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
43392 arg "dialog-show character"
43403 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43409 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
43412 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
43420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43425 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
43428 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43435 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43441 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
43446 arg "textstyle-apply"
43456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43461 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
43462 Format text using the current settings in the
43464 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43466 \begin_inset space ~
43469 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43480 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43503 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43504 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43506 \begin_inset space ~
43515 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43524 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43538 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43545 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43552 arg "tabular-insert"
43560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43566 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43573 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43579 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
43582 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
43590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43595 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
43598 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43605 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43614 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
43622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43626 Toggle outline window on/off,
43628 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43635 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43644 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
43652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43656 Toggle math toolbar on/off
43662 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43671 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
43679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43683 Toggle table toolbar on/off
43696 \begin_layout Subsection
43698 \begin_inset Index idx
43701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43710 \begin_layout Standard
43711 \begin_inset Graphics
43712 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
43720 \begin_layout Standard
43721 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43727 \begin_layout Standard
43728 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43732 \begin_layout Standard
43733 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43739 \begin_layout Standard
43740 \begin_inset Tabular
43741 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
43742 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43743 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43744 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43745 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43772 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43781 arg "layout Enumerate"
43789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43799 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43808 arg "layout Itemize"
43816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43826 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43853 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43862 arg "layout Description"
43870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43880 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43889 arg "depth-increment"
43897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43903 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43905 \begin_inset space ~
43909 \begin_inset space ~
43918 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43927 arg "depth-decrement"
43935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43941 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43943 \begin_inset space ~
43947 \begin_inset space ~
43956 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43965 arg "float-insert figure"
43973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43979 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43980 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43987 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43996 arg "float-insert table"
44004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44010 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44011 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44018 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44041 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44048 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44057 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44071 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44078 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44087 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
44095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44101 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44108 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44131 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44133 \begin_inset space ~
44142 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44151 arg "nomencl-insert"
44159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44165 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44167 \begin_inset space ~
44176 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44185 arg "footnote-insert"
44193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44199 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44206 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44215 arg "marginalnote-insert"
44223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44229 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44231 \begin_inset space ~
44240 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44263 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44264 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
44266 \begin_inset space ~
44275 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44284 arg "box-insert Frameless"
44292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44298 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44305 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44328 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44335 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44358 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44360 \begin_inset space ~
44369 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44378 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
44386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44392 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44393 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44400 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44409 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
44417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44423 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44424 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44426 \begin_inset space ~
44435 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44444 arg "dialog-show character"
44452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44458 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44460 \begin_inset space ~
44463 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44470 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44476 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
44481 arg "textstyle-apply"
44489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44494 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
44495 Format text using the recent settings in the
44498 arg "dialog-show character"
44507 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44516 arg "layout-paragraph"
44524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44530 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44532 \begin_inset space ~
44541 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44550 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44564 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44578 \begin_layout Subsection
44579 View/Update Toolbar
44580 \begin_inset Index idx
44583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44584 Toolbar ! View / Update
44592 \begin_layout Standard
44593 \begin_inset Graphics
44594 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
44601 \begin_layout Standard
44602 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44608 \begin_layout Standard
44609 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44613 \begin_layout Standard
44614 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44620 \begin_layout Standard
44621 \begin_inset Tabular
44622 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
44623 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44624 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44625 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44626 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44649 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44656 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44665 arg "buffer-update"
44673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44679 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44686 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44695 arg "master-buffer-view"
44703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44709 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44711 \begin_inset space ~
44720 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44729 arg "master-buffer-update"
44737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44743 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44745 \begin_inset space ~
44749 \begin_inset space ~
44758 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44767 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
44775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44781 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44782 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44783 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44784 Synchronize with Output
44790 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44801 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
44811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44817 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44818 View (Other Formats)
44824 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44831 arg "update-others"
44835 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
44843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44849 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44850 Update (Other Formats)
44863 \begin_layout Standard
44865 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
44866 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
44872 \begin_layout Subsection
44876 \begin_layout Standard
44877 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
44878 \begin_inset space ~
44882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44884 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44888 , the table toolbar
44889 \begin_inset Index idx
44892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44901 \begin_inset space ~
44906 manual and the math macro toolbar
44907 \begin_inset Index idx
44910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44923 \begin_layout Chapter
44924 The Document Settings
44925 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44927 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44932 \begin_inset Index idx
44935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44936 Document ! Settings
44944 \begin_layout Standard
44948 \begin_inset space ~
44953 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
44954 is called with the menu
44956 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44960 You can save your document settings as default with the
44962 Save as Document Defaults
44964 button in any dialog.
44965 This will create a template named
44969 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
44970 when you create a new document without
44974 \begin_layout Standard
44979 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
44980 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
44983 \begin_layout Standard
44984 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
44985 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
44986 to find the one you are looking for.
44987 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
44988 the submenus of the dialog.
44990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44994 \begin_inset space \space{}
44998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45005 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
45006 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
45007 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
45010 \begin_layout Section
45014 \begin_layout Standard
45015 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
45017 Document classes are described in section
45018 \begin_inset space ~
45022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45024 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
45032 \begin_layout Standard
45036 \begin_inset space ~
45041 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45046 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45047 as a layout for a document class.
45048 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45050 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45059 \begin_layout Standard
45060 Some classes use special class options by default.
45061 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45065 and you can decide to use them or not.
45066 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45067 recommended you leave them untouched.
45072 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45073 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45078 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45080 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
45085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45086 When you want to use one of the following drivers
45087 \begin_inset Newline newline
45092 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
45095 \begin_inset Newline newline
45098 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45099 distribution, see section
45104 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45106 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
45119 \begin_layout Standard
45124 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
45125 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
45126 in the background if the child document
45127 is opened without its master.
45128 This way child documents are always compilable.
45129 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
45136 \begin_inset space ~
45144 \begin_layout Standard
45145 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45156 \begin_inset Index idx
45159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45161 packages ! prettyref
45167 \begin_inset Index idx
45170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45172 packages ! refstyle
45177 for cross-references, see section
45178 \begin_inset space ~
45182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45184 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45191 \begin_layout Section
45195 \begin_layout Standard
45196 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
45197 Please refer to the section
45200 \begin_inset space ~
45208 \begin_inset space ~
45213 manual for details.
45216 \begin_layout Section
45220 \begin_layout Standard
45221 Modules are explained in section
45222 \begin_inset space ~
45226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45228 reference "subsec:Modules"
45235 \begin_layout Section
45239 \begin_layout Standard
45241 \begin_inset space ~
45245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45247 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
45254 \begin_layout Section
45258 \begin_layout Standard
45259 The document font settings are described in section
45260 \begin_inset space ~
45264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45266 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
45273 \begin_layout Section
45277 \begin_layout Standard
45278 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
45290 \begin_inset space ~
45295 and whether it should be a
45298 \begin_inset space ~
45303 can also be specified here.
45306 \begin_layout Standard
45307 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
45308 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
45309 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
45311 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
45314 \begin_layout Standard
45317 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
45320 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
45321 justifies the text on screen.
45322 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
45324 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
45328 \begin_layout Standard
45330 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
45339 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
45344 \begin_layout Section
45348 \begin_layout Standard
45349 This dialog is described in sections
45350 \begin_inset space ~
45354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45356 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
45361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45363 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
45370 \begin_layout Section
45374 \begin_layout Standard
45375 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
45376 \begin_inset space ~
45380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45382 reference "subsec:Margins"
45389 \begin_layout Section
45391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45393 name "sec:Language-encodings"
45398 \begin_inset Index idx
45401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45402 Language ! Encoding
45410 \begin_layout Standard
45411 The document language and quote styles are set here.
45412 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45413 (the \SpecialChar LyX
45415 is always encoded in utf8).
45416 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
45417 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
45418 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45419 -command is not known for
45420 a particular character).
45421 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
45425 \begin_layout Standard
45427 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
45428 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45429 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
45430 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
45431 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
45432 's default encoding).
45433 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
45434 's Unicode support covers the
45435 characters of most scripts.
45436 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
45437 using one of the traditional, or
45438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45445 , encodings is necessary.
45448 \begin_layout Standard
45450 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
45452 provides support for these traditional encodings.
45455 Traditional (auto-selected)
45461 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
45462 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
45463 the given language(s).
45465 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45469 \begin_layout Standard
45471 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45472 If you use the option
45477 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
45480 If the document contains text in more than one language you
45481 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
45484 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45487 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
45488 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
45489 exactly one encoding.
45490 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
45495 \begin_layout Standard
45497 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
45498 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
45504 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
45505 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45509 \begin_layout Standard
45511 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
45512 Finally, you can also select
45516 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
45517 Note that this encoding is then used for
45522 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
45523 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
45527 \begin_layout Standard
45529 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
45532 Do not load inputenc
45534 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
45535 from automatically loading the
45542 \begin_inset Index idx
45545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45547 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
45549 packages ! inputenc
45555 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
45556 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
45557 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45558 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45559 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45561 Note that this option is only available for the standard
45567 Traditional (auto-selected)
45574 \begin_layout Standard
45576 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
45578 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
45579 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
45580 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45581 installation supports Unicode), choose
45582 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
45583 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45584 is quite incomplete, so
45585 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
45590 (when \SpecialChar LyX
45591 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45592 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
45593 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45594 -commands is not used, because all
45595 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
45596 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45597 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45598 , two new alternative engines
45599 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45601 Both engines support Unicode natively.
45603 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
45606 \begin_inset space ~
45614 \begin_inset space ~
45622 \begin_inset space ~
45628 \begin_inset space ~
45632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45634 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
45639 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
45643 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
45648 \begin_layout Standard
45652 \begin_inset space ~
45657 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45658 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
45660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45668 The possible settings are:
45671 \begin_layout Description
45672 Default uses the language package that is selected in
45674 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45675 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45679 \begin_inset space ~
45683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45685 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45692 \begin_layout Description
45693 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
45694 format you will use.
45695 In many cases this will be
45700 \begin_inset Index idx
45703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45711 If the newer package
45716 \begin_inset Index idx
45719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45721 packages ! polyglossia
45726 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45727 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45728 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
45730 this package will be used instead of
45737 \begin_layout Description
45739 \begin_inset space ~
45750 would be more appropriate.
45753 \begin_layout Description
45754 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
45755 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
45759 (for German texts), type in
45762 \begin_inset Newline newline
45767 usepackage{ngerman}
45770 \begin_layout Description
45771 None will not use a language package.
45772 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
45775 \begin_layout Standard
45776 Here is a list with the important encodings:
45779 \begin_layout Description
45781 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
45783 \begin_inset space ~
45787 \begin_inset space ~
45791 \begin_inset space ~
45798 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45804 \begin_inset Index idx
45807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45809 packages ! inputenc
45815 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45816 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45817 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45823 \begin_layout Description
45824 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
45826 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
45827 commands, which may result in a big
45828 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
45829 -commands are needed.
45831 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
45832 This is the same as the
45845 \begin_layout Description
45847 \begin_inset space ~
45851 \begin_inset space ~
45854 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
45857 \begin_layout Description
45859 \begin_inset space ~
45863 \begin_inset space ~
45866 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
45869 \begin_layout Description
45871 \begin_inset space ~
45874 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
45877 \begin_layout Description
45879 \begin_inset space ~
45883 \begin_inset space ~
45886 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
45887 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
45890 \begin_layout Description
45892 \begin_inset space ~
45896 \begin_inset space ~
45899 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
45903 \begin_layout Description
45905 \begin_inset space ~
45909 \begin_inset space ~
45912 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
45913 ISO-8859-13 encoding
45916 \begin_layout Description
45918 \begin_inset space ~
45922 \begin_inset space ~
45926 \begin_inset space ~
45929 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
45930 \begin_inset space ~
45936 \begin_layout Description
45938 \begin_inset space ~
45942 \begin_inset space ~
45946 \begin_inset space ~
45949 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
45950 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
45953 \begin_layout Description
45955 \begin_inset space ~
45959 \begin_inset space ~
45962 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
45963 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
45964 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45965 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
45966 \begin_inset space ~
45970 \begin_inset space ~
45976 \begin_layout Description
45978 \begin_inset space ~
45982 \begin_inset space ~
45985 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
45986 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
45987 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45989 should try to use the encoding Unicode
45990 \begin_inset space ~
45994 \begin_inset space ~
46000 \begin_layout Description
46002 \begin_inset space ~
46006 \begin_inset space ~
46009 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
46012 \begin_layout Description
46014 \begin_inset space ~
46018 \begin_inset space ~
46021 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
46024 \begin_layout Description
46026 \begin_inset space ~
46030 \begin_inset space ~
46033 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
46036 \begin_layout Description
46038 \begin_inset space ~
46041 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
46044 \begin_layout Description
46046 \begin_inset space ~
46049 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46052 \begin_layout Description
46054 \begin_inset space ~
46058 \begin_inset space ~
46061 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46064 \begin_layout Description
46066 \begin_inset space ~
46070 \begin_inset space ~
46076 \begin_layout Description
46078 \begin_inset space ~
46082 \begin_inset space ~
46085 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
46088 \begin_layout Description
46090 \begin_inset space ~
46094 \begin_inset space ~
46100 \begin_layout Description
46102 \begin_inset space ~
46106 \begin_inset space ~
46109 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46115 \begin_inset Index idx
46118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46125 , when using this, set the document language to
46130 \begin_layout Description
46132 \begin_inset space ~
46136 \begin_inset space ~
46139 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46144 , when using this, set the document language to
46147 \begin_inset space ~
46153 \begin_layout Description
46155 \begin_inset space ~
46159 \begin_inset space ~
46162 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46168 \begin_inset Index idx
46171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46173 packages ! japanese
46178 , when using this, set the document language to
46183 \begin_layout Description
46185 \begin_inset space ~
46189 \begin_inset space ~
46192 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46197 , when using this, set the document language to
46202 \begin_layout Description
46204 \begin_inset space ~
46208 \begin_inset space ~
46211 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46216 , when using this, set the document language to
46221 \begin_layout Description
46223 \begin_inset space ~
46226 (EUC-KR) for Korean
46229 \begin_layout Description
46231 \begin_inset space ~
46235 \begin_inset space ~
46239 \begin_inset space ~
46242 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
46245 \begin_layout Description
46247 \begin_inset space ~
46251 \begin_inset space ~
46255 \begin_inset space ~
46258 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
46259 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
46260 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
46263 \begin_layout Description
46265 \begin_inset space ~
46269 \begin_inset space ~
46275 \begin_layout Description
46277 \begin_inset space ~
46281 \begin_inset space ~
46284 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
46285 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
46288 \begin_layout Description
46290 \begin_inset space ~
46294 \begin_inset space ~
46297 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46303 \begin_inset Index idx
46306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46313 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
46314 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
46316 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46317 with the default encoding (
46319 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46325 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
46326 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46331 \begin_layout Description
46333 \begin_inset space ~
46341 \begin_inset space ~
46344 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
46351 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46354 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46361 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46362 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46364 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46367 \begin_layout Description
46369 \begin_inset space ~
46373 \begin_inset space ~
46376 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46382 \begin_inset Index idx
46385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46393 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
46396 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
46398 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
46399 This used to be more comprehensive than
46402 \begin_inset space ~
46407 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
46412 \begin_layout Description
46414 \begin_inset space ~
46417 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46423 \begin_inset Index idx
46426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46428 packages ! inputenc
46435 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
46436 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
46438 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
46439 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46440 with the default encoding (
46442 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46448 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
46449 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46454 \begin_layout Description
46456 \begin_inset space ~
46460 \begin_inset space ~
46464 \begin_inset space ~
46467 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
46468 \begin_inset space ~
46474 \begin_layout Description
46476 \begin_inset space ~
46480 \begin_inset space ~
46484 \begin_inset space ~
46487 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
46488 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
46489 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
46493 \begin_layout Description
46495 \begin_inset space ~
46499 \begin_inset space ~
46503 \begin_inset space ~
46506 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
46507 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
46510 \begin_layout Section
46512 \begin_inset Index idx
46515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46522 \begin_inset Index idx
46525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46532 \begin_inset Index idx
46535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46536 Color ! Shaded boxes
46542 \begin_inset Index idx
46545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46546 Color ! Greyed-out notes
46554 \begin_layout Standard
46555 Here you can alter the font color for the
46559 (default: black), for
46562 \begin_inset space ~
46567 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
46571 (default: white) and for
46574 \begin_inset space ~
46584 sets the color back to the default.
46587 \begin_layout Standard
46588 Clicking any button showing
46596 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
46597 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
46598 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
46599 later more quickly.
46602 \begin_layout Standard
46603 Note, if you change the
46606 \begin_inset space ~
46611 font color and use the option
46614 \begin_inset space ~
46619 in the document settings under
46622 \begin_inset space ~
46627 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
46628 \begin_inset space ~
46632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46634 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46641 \begin_layout Standard
46642 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
46648 \begin_layout Standard
46652 \begin_inset space ~
46661 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
46664 \begin_inset space ~
46667 Code after a forced page break:
46670 \begin_layout Itemize
46671 For the page color:
46672 \begin_inset Newline newline
46679 pagecolor{color name}
46682 \begin_layout Itemize
46683 For the text color:
46684 \begin_inset Newline newline
46694 \begin_layout Standard
46695 You are restricted to one of
46731 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
46738 \begin_inset space ~
46744 \begin_inset Newline newline
46747 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
46748 names to refer to them:
46751 \begin_layout Itemize
46757 \begin_inset Newline newline
46762 page_backgroundcolor
46765 \begin_layout Itemize
46769 \begin_inset space ~
46775 \begin_inset Newline newline
46783 \begin_layout Itemize
46787 \begin_inset space ~
46793 \begin_inset Newline newline
46801 \begin_layout Itemize
46805 \begin_inset space ~
46811 \begin_inset Newline newline
46819 \begin_layout Standard
46820 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
46823 \begin_inset space ~
46831 \begin_inset space ~
46839 \begin_layout Section
46843 \begin_layout Standard
46844 Here you can adjust the
46848 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
46852 as described in section
46853 \begin_inset space ~
46857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46859 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
46864 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
46868 \begin_layout Standard
46870 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
46871 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
46873 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
46874 of this package can be used as well.
46875 The most common one are:
46878 \begin_layout Description
46880 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
46881 right Line numbers to the right margin
46884 \begin_layout Description
46886 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
46887 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
46891 \begin_layout Description
46893 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
46894 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
46897 \begin_layout Description
46899 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
46900 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
46903 \begin_layout Description
46905 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
46907 \begin_inset space ~
46910 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
46915 \begin_layout Section
46919 \begin_layout Standard
46920 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46926 \begin_inset Index idx
46929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46931 packages ! biblatex
46941 \begin_inset Index idx
46944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46956 \begin_inset Index idx
46959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46967 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46970 Sectioned bibliography
46972 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46978 \begin_inset Index idx
46981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46983 packages ! bibtopic
46993 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
46994 Finally, you can select a document-specific
46998 for the generation of the bibliography.
46999 For a further description of these possibilities see section
47000 \begin_inset space ~
47004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47006 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47013 \begin_layout Section
47017 \begin_layout Standard
47018 Here you can define the
47022 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
47024 \begin_inset space ~
47028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47030 reference "sec:Index"
47037 \begin_layout Section
47041 \begin_layout Standard
47042 The PDF properties are explained in section
47043 \begin_inset space ~
47047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47049 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47056 \begin_layout Section
47060 \begin_layout Standard
47061 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
47062 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47068 \begin_inset Index idx
47071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47083 \begin_inset Index idx
47086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47098 \begin_inset Index idx
47101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47113 \begin_inset Index idx
47116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47128 \begin_inset Index idx
47131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47133 packages ! mathdots
47143 \begin_inset Index idx
47146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47148 packages ! mathtools
47158 \begin_inset Index idx
47161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47173 \begin_inset Index idx
47176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47178 packages ! stackrel
47188 \begin_inset Index idx
47191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47193 packages ! stmaryrd
47203 \begin_inset Index idx
47206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47208 packages ! undertilde
47213 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
47216 \begin_layout Description
47217 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47218 -errors in formulas,
47219 ensure that you have this enabled.
47222 \begin_layout Description
47223 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
47224 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47225 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
47229 \begin_layout Description
47230 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
47233 \begin_inset space ~
47245 \begin_layout Description
47246 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
47249 \begin_inset space ~
47261 \begin_layout Description
47262 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
47273 \begin_layout Description
47274 mathtools is used for the math commands
47310 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
47317 \begin_layout Description
47318 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
47320 Chemical Symbols and Equations
47329 \begin_layout Description
47330 stackrel is used for the math command
47347 \begin_layout Description
47348 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
47351 \begin_layout Description
47352 undertilde is used for the math command
47360 Accents for one Character
47369 \begin_layout Section
47371 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
47373 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
47379 \begin_layout Standard
47381 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
47382 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
47385 \begin_layout Standard
47387 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
47388 The float placement options
47389 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
47392 are described in the section
47395 \begin_inset space ~
47399 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
47401 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
47409 \begin_inset space ~
47417 \begin_layout Section
47421 \begin_layout Standard
47422 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
47424 Program Code Listings
47429 \begin_inset space ~
47437 \begin_layout Section
47441 \begin_layout Standard
47442 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
47450 set to be used and set the
47455 The itemize environment is described in section
47456 \begin_inset space ~
47460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47462 reference "sec:Itemize"
47469 \begin_layout Standard
47470 You can furthermore specify a
47473 \begin_inset space ~
47478 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47479 command of the desired character.
47480 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
47487 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
47489 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47493 \begin_inset space \space{}
47497 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
47507 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
47508 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
47511 \begin_layout Standard
47512 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47520 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47521 -packages in the preamble (menu
47524 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47525 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47528 \begin_inset space ~
47534 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
47538 usepackage{textcomp}
47541 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
47545 usepackage{amssymb}
47555 \begin_layout Section
47559 \begin_layout Standard
47560 Branches are described in section
47561 \begin_inset space ~
47565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47567 reference "sec:Branches"
47574 \begin_layout Section
47576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47578 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
47585 \begin_layout Standard
47586 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
47589 \begin_layout Description
47591 \begin_inset space ~
47595 \begin_inset space ~
47598 Format: The format that is used when you enter
47599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47618 View Master Document
47619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47626 Update Master Document
47627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47634 menu or the toolbar.
47635 The default is set in
47637 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47638 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47640 \begin_inset space ~
47643 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
47647 \begin_inset space ~
47651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47653 reference "sec:File-Formats"
47660 \begin_layout Description
47662 \begin_inset space ~
47666 \begin_inset space ~
47669 Output settings for the menu
47671 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47673 \begin_inset space ~
47679 For a detailed description see section
47681 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47686 \begin_inset space ~
47694 \begin_layout Description
47696 \begin_inset space ~
47700 \begin_inset space ~
47703 Options offers settings for the export format
47711 \begin_inset space ~
47716 will assure that the output follows exactly version
47717 \begin_inset space ~
47720 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
47724 \begin_inset space ~
47729 settings are described in detail in section
47731 Math Output in XHTML
47736 \begin_inset space ~
47745 \begin_inset space ~
47749 \begin_inset space ~
47754 is used for the size of equations in the output.
47757 \begin_layout Description
47759 \begin_inset space ~
47764 Save transient properties
47766 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
47767 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
47768 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
47772 \begin_layout Itemize
47773 the activation of change tracking
47776 \begin_layout Itemize
47777 the output of tracked changes
47780 \begin_layout Itemize
47781 the recording of the document directory path.
47784 \begin_layout Standard
47785 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
47786 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
47790 \begin_layout Section
47798 \begin_layout Standard
47799 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47801 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
47803 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47805 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
47809 \begin_layout Standard
47810 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47811 -syntax is given in section
47812 \begin_inset space ~
47816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47818 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
47825 \begin_layout Chapter
47831 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47833 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
47838 \begin_inset Index idx
47841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47850 \begin_layout Standard
47851 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
47853 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47857 It has the following submenus.
47860 \begin_layout Section
47864 \begin_layout Subsection
47868 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47869 User Interface File
47870 \begin_inset Index idx
47873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47874 Customization ! of toolbars
47880 \begin_inset Index idx
47883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47884 Customization ! of menus
47892 \begin_layout Standard
47893 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
47894 interface (ui) file.
47895 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
47903 \begin_layout Description
47908 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
47911 \begin_layout Description
47918 the menu entries in popup context menus
47921 \begin_layout Description
47926 specifies the toolbar buttons
47929 \begin_layout Standard
47930 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
47931 and edit the entries.
47934 \begin_layout Standard
47935 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
47947 entries must be finished with an explicit
47972 and in the case of the
47973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47985 The syntax for the entries is:
47988 \begin_layout Standard
47989 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48018 \begin_layout Standard
48020 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48023 All the \SpecialChar LyX
48024 -functions are listed in the menu
48026 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
48028 \begin_inset space ~
48036 \begin_layout Standard
48037 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48043 \begin_layout Standard
48044 For example, assuming you use the menu
48046 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48049 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
48053 \begin_layout Standard
48054 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48078 \begin_layout Standard
48080 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48095 to have the sixth bookmark.
48098 \begin_layout Standard
48102 \begin_inset space ~
48107 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
48108 's toolbar buttons.
48109 The currently available icon sets are compared in
48110 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48113 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
48121 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48125 \begin_layout Standard
48128 Enable tool tips in main work area
48130 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
48134 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48138 \begin_layout Standard
48143 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
48144 should display in the menu
48146 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48148 \begin_inset space ~
48156 \begin_layout Subsection
48160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48164 \begin_layout Standard
48167 Restore window layouts and geometries
48170 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
48171 the last \SpecialChar LyX
48175 \begin_layout Standard
48178 Restore cursor positions
48180 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
48184 \begin_layout Standard
48187 Load opened files from last session
48189 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
48193 \begin_layout Standard
48196 Clear all session information
48198 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
48199 sessions (cursor positions, names
48200 of last opened documents, etc.).
48203 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48207 name "subsec:Backup documents"
48212 \begin_inset Index idx
48215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48224 \begin_layout Standard
48227 Backup original documents when saving
48229 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
48230 it was saved the last time.
48231 It is stored in the
48234 \begin_inset space ~
48240 \begin_inset space ~
48244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48246 reference "sec:Paths"
48250 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
48253 \begin_inset space ~
48259 The backup file has the file extension
48260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48274 \begin_layout Standard
48277 Backup documents, every
48279 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
48282 \begin_layout Standard
48285 Save documents compressed by default
48287 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
48288 \begin_inset space ~
48292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48294 reference "subsec:Compressed"
48299 This applies to newly created documents only.
48300 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
48303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48304 Windows & work area
48307 \begin_layout Standard
48310 Open documents in tabs
48312 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
48316 \begin_layout Standard
48321 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
48326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48328 \begin_inset space ~
48332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48334 reference "sec:Paths"
48338 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
48345 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
48346 documents will be opened in the same running instance
48347 of \SpecialChar LyX
48349 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
48350 instance is created for each file.
48353 \begin_layout Standard
48356 Single close-tab button
48358 is checked, there will only be one close button (
48368 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
48369 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
48370 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
48374 \begin_layout Standard
48375 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48383 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
48384 before the change takes effect.
48392 \begin_layout Standard
48397 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
48399 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
48401 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
48405 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
48406 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
48407 and only want to close the view in once instance.
48410 \begin_layout Subsection
48412 \begin_inset Index idx
48415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48424 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
48431 \begin_layout Standard
48432 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
48436 \begin_layout Standard
48437 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48445 This section only deals with the fonts
48449 the \SpecialChar LyX
48451 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
48454 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48455 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48466 \begin_layout Standard
48467 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
48484 (depends on the system) as its
48487 \begin_inset space ~
48503 \begin_layout Standard
48504 You can change the font size with the
48511 \begin_layout Standard
48516 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
48518 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48521 points have the size of 1
48522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48526 \begin_inset space ~
48530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48532 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
48537 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
48538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48542 The sizes are explained in detail in section
48543 \begin_inset space ~
48547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48549 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
48556 \begin_layout Subsection
48558 \begin_inset Index idx
48561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48562 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
48569 \begin_inset Index idx
48572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48581 \begin_layout Standard
48582 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
48583 by choosing an item in the
48584 list and selecting the
48591 \begin_layout Standard
48592 By checking the option
48596 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
48599 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
48600 \begin_inset space ~
48604 \begin_inset space ~
48609 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
48612 \begin_layout Subsection
48614 \begin_inset Index idx
48617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48626 \begin_layout Standard
48627 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
48631 \begin_layout Standard
48636 enables previewing snippets of your document.
48637 This feature is described in section
48638 \begin_inset space ~
48642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48644 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48651 \begin_layout Standard
48652 Checking the option
48655 \begin_inset space ~
48659 \begin_inset space ~
48663 \begin_inset space ~
48668 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
48671 \begin_layout Section
48673 \begin_inset Index idx
48676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48685 \begin_layout Subsection
48689 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48693 \begin_layout Standard
48696 Cursor follows scrollbar
48698 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
48702 \begin_layout Standard
48703 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
48704 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
48705 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
48708 \begin_layout Standard
48711 Scroll below end of document
48713 is self-explanatory.
48716 \begin_layout Standard
48717 In \SpecialChar LyX
48718 one can jump from word to word by pressing
48725 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
48727 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
48728 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
48731 \begin_layout Standard
48734 Sort environments alphabetically
48736 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48739 \begin_layout Standard
48742 Group environments by their category
48744 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48747 \begin_layout Standard
48752 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
48763 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48767 \begin_layout Standard
48768 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
48773 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
48774 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
48778 \begin_layout Subsection
48780 \begin_inset Index idx
48783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48790 \begin_inset Index idx
48793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48794 Settings ! Shortcuts
48802 \begin_layout Standard
48807 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
48809 Several binding files are available, among them:
48812 \begin_layout Description
48813 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
48816 \begin_layout Description
48817 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
48829 \begin_layout Description
48830 mac.bind a set of bindings for
48833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48841 \begin_layout Standard
48842 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
48847 , and binding files for special languages.
48848 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
48849 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48853 \begin_inset space \space{}
48857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48865 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
48866 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
48867 will try to use the appropriate binding
48871 \begin_layout Standard
48872 Some binding files, like
48876 , only have a limited scope.
48877 When looking at the end of the file
48881 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
48884 \begin_layout Standard
48888 \begin_inset space ~
48892 \begin_inset space ~
48897 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
48898 in the selected key binding file.
48901 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48903 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48905 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
48910 \begin_inset Index idx
48913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48914 Key Bindings ! Editing
48922 \begin_layout Standard
48923 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
48924 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
48925 functions and the bound shortcuts.
48926 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
48929 Show key-bindings containing
48932 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
48933 Insert there for example as keyword
48934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48941 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
48942 functions that contain
48943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48951 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
48952 All \SpecialChar LyX
48953 functions are also listed in the file
48958 that you will find in the
48965 \begin_layout Standard
48966 For example, to add the shortcut
48974 , select the function and press the
48979 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
48980 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
48983 \begin_layout Standard
48984 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
48985 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
48987 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
48988 function names as a semicolon separated list.
48990 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
48995 \begin_layout Standard
48996 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
48999 \begin_layout Standard
49000 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
49002 The syntax of the entries is:
49005 \begin_layout Standard
49011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49030 \begin_layout Standard
49031 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
49032 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
49033 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49060 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
49061 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
49062 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
49063 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
49065 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
49069 , you needed to specify it as
49074 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
49077 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
49080 \begin_layout Subsection
49082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49084 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
49089 \begin_inset Index idx
49092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49099 \begin_inset Index idx
49102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49103 Settings ! Keyboard Map
49111 \begin_layout Standard
49112 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
49113 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
49114 provides keyboard maps.
49115 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
49116 is a Romanian one, you can enable
49119 \begin_inset space ~
49123 \begin_inset space ~
49128 and select the keyboard map file named
49135 \begin_layout Standard
49144 keyboard map and, if you use the
49148 bindings, you can select the first and second with
49151 arg "keymap-primary"
49157 arg "keymap-secondary"
49160 respectively or toggle between them with
49163 arg "keymap-toggle"
49169 \begin_layout Standard
49170 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49178 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
49187 \begin_layout Standard
49188 You can also specify the mouse
49190 Wheel scrolling speed
49193 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
49197 Middle mouse button pasting
49199 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
49200 inserts the content of the clipboard.
49203 \begin_layout Standard
49211 \begin_inset space ~
49215 \begin_inset space ~
49220 you can select a key for zooming.
49221 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
49224 \begin_layout Subsection
49228 \begin_layout Standard
49229 Input completion is described in section
49230 \begin_inset space ~
49234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49236 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
49243 \begin_layout Section
49245 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49252 \begin_inset Index idx
49255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49262 \begin_inset Index idx
49265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49274 \begin_layout Standard
49275 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
49276 are normally determined during
49278 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
49281 \begin_layout Description
49283 \begin_inset space ~
49286 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
49287 's working directory.
49288 It is the default when you
49299 \begin_inset space ~
49307 \begin_layout Description
49309 \begin_inset space ~
49312 templates This directory
49313 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
49314 contains the templates that are shown
49315 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
49316 will be opened when you use the menu
49317 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
49322 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49324 \begin_inset space ~
49328 \begin_inset space ~
49336 \begin_layout Description
49338 \begin_inset space ~
49341 files This directory
49342 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
49343 will be opened when you use the
49344 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
49345 contains the example files that are listed in
49348 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
49357 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49359 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
49361 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
49367 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
49369 \begin_inset Newline newline
49373 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49385 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
49386 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
49396 \begin_layout Description
49398 \begin_inset space ~
49402 \begin_inset Index idx
49405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49411 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
49412 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
49413 \begin_inset space ~
49417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49419 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49427 will be used to save the backups.
49428 \begin_inset Newline newline
49431 Backup files have the ending
49432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49442 \begin_layout Description
49444 \begin_inset space ~
49447 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
49448 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
49450 \begin_inset Newline newline
49457 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49463 You can edit this file with the program
49472 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
49473 in its preferences under
49476 \begin_inset space ~
49482 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
49487 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
49489 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
49490 in your \SpecialChar LyX
49496 and \SpecialChar LyX
49497 need to be running the same time.
49498 \begin_inset Newline newline
49501 The pipe is also used for the
49505 feature, see section
49506 \begin_inset space ~
49510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49512 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49517 \begin_inset Newline newline
49520 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
49521 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
49522 \begin_inset Newline newline
49538 \begin_layout Description
49540 \begin_inset space ~
49543 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
49546 \begin_layout Description
49548 \begin_inset space ~
49551 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
49552 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
49553 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
49556 \begin_layout Description
49558 \begin_inset space ~
49561 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
49567 You only need to specify it if you are using
49571 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
49573 For \SpecialChar LyX
49578 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
49582 \begin_layout Description
49584 \begin_inset space ~
49587 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
49588 When \SpecialChar LyX
49589 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
49590 to find it on the system.
49591 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
49593 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
49595 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49602 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
49603 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
49606 \begin_layout Description
49608 \begin_inset space ~
49611 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
49612 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
49613 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
49614 code or in the document
49616 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
49618 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
49619 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
49620 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
49621 scanned for the input files.
49622 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
49623 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
49625 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
49626 compilation may fail for some documents.
49629 \begin_layout Section
49633 \begin_layout Standard
49634 Here you can insert your
49643 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
49645 \begin_inset space ~
49649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49651 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49655 , to mark changes you make as yours.
49658 \begin_layout Section
49660 \begin_inset Index idx
49663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49664 Language ! Settings
49670 \begin_inset Index idx
49673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49674 Settings ! Language
49682 \begin_layout Subsection
49684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49686 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
49693 \begin_layout Description
49695 \begin_inset space ~
49699 \begin_inset space ~
49702 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
49704 You can find its actual translation status here:
49705 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49707 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
49715 \begin_layout Description
49717 \begin_inset space ~
49720 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
49721 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
49722 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
49723 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
49724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49740 The most widespread language package is
49745 \begin_inset Index idx
49748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49755 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
49757 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
49758 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
49759 come with the alternative
49765 \begin_inset Index idx
49768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49770 packages ! polyglossia
49775 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
49776 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
49782 The available selections are described in section
49783 \begin_inset space ~
49787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49789 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
49796 \begin_layout Description
49798 \begin_inset space ~
49801 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49802 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
49803 you can here specify the command to start the package.
49804 An example is the start command
49810 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
49812 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
49816 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49832 selectlanguage{$$lang}
49837 \begin_layout Description
49839 \begin_inset space ~
49847 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
49848 command toggles the package on and off.
49851 \begin_layout Description
49853 \begin_inset space ~
49857 \begin_inset space ~
49860 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
49864 \begin_layout Description
49866 \begin_inset space ~
49870 \begin_inset space ~
49873 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
49877 \begin_layout Description
49879 \begin_inset space ~
49883 \begin_inset space ~
49886 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
49887 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
49888 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
49890 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
49897 \begin_layout Description
49899 \begin_inset space ~
49902 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
49904 When this option is not set, the
49907 \begin_inset space ~
49912 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49914 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
49917 \begin_inset space ~
49925 \begin_layout Description
49927 \begin_inset space ~
49933 \begin_inset space ~
49939 When it is not set, the
49942 \begin_inset space ~
49947 is set to the end of the document.
49950 \begin_layout Description
49952 \begin_inset space ~
49956 \begin_inset space ~
49959 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
49960 language will be underlined in blue.
49963 \begin_layout Description
49965 \begin_inset space ~
49969 \begin_inset space ~
49972 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
49973 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
49976 \begin_layout Description
49978 \begin_inset space ~
49981 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
49982 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
49983 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
49984 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
49987 \begin_layout Subsection
49991 \begin_layout Standard
49992 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
49993 \begin_inset space ~
49997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49999 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
50006 \begin_layout Section
50010 \begin_layout Subsection
50012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50014 name "subsec:General-output"
50021 \begin_layout Description
50023 \begin_inset space ~
50026 search Commands that will be used for the menu
50028 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50030 \begin_inset space ~
50036 For a detailed description see section
50038 Reverse DVI/PDF search
50043 \begin_inset space ~
50051 \begin_layout Description
50053 \begin_inset space ~
50056 Options Options for the program
50060 that is used for the export format
50065 \begin_inset space ~
50069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50071 reference "subsec:Export"
50076 Possible options are listed in the
50081 \begin_inset Newline newline
50085 \begin_inset Flex URL
50088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50090 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
50100 \begin_layout Description
50102 \begin_inset space ~
50106 \begin_inset space ~
50109 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
50112 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50113 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
50115 \begin_inset space ~
50121 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
50124 \begin_layout Description
50126 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
50128 \begin_inset space ~
50132 \begin_inset Index idx
50135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50142 \begin_inset Index idx
50145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50146 Settings ! Date format
50151 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
50152 \begin_inset Newline newline
50156 \begin_inset Flex URL
50159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50161 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
50167 \begin_inset Newline newline
50170 For example the format
50171 \begin_inset Newline newline
50175 \begin_inset Newline newline
50178 prints the date as day/month/year.
50183 \begin_layout Description
50185 \begin_inset space ~
50189 \begin_inset space ~
50192 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
50193 is allowed to overwrite on export.
50196 \begin_layout Subsection
50202 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50204 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
50209 \begin_inset Index idx
50212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50213 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
50222 \begin_layout Description
50224 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
50226 \begin_inset space ~
50234 \begin_inset space ~
50238 \begin_inset space ~
50241 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
50246 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
50267 are used for Cyrillic.
50268 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
50269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50281 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
50283 sets up in the background.
50284 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
50289 \begin_layout Description
50291 \begin_inset space ~
50295 \begin_inset space ~
50299 \begin_inset space ~
50303 \begin_inset space ~
50306 options They only have an effect when the program
50310 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
50313 \begin_layout Standard
50314 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
50315 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
50316 manuals of the applications.
50319 \begin_layout Description
50321 \begin_inset space ~
50324 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
50325 \begin_inset space ~
50329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50331 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
50338 \begin_layout Description
50340 \begin_inset space ~
50343 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
50344 \begin_inset space ~
50348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50350 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
50357 \begin_layout Description
50359 \begin_inset space ~
50362 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
50363 \begin_inset space ~
50367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50369 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
50376 \begin_layout Description
50382 \begin_inset space ~
50385 command Command for the program
50387 Check\SpecialChar TeX
50390 that is described in the section
50392 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
50397 Additional Features
50402 \begin_layout Standard
50403 There are additionally the following options:
50406 \begin_layout Description
50408 \begin_inset space ~
50412 \begin_inset space ~
50416 \begin_inset space ~
50420 \begin_inset space ~
50425 \begin_inset space ~
50428 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
50429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50446 to separate folders.
50447 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
50449 \begin_inset Index idx
50452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50459 \begin_inset Index idx
50462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50471 \begin_layout Description
50473 \begin_inset space ~
50477 \begin_inset space ~
50481 \begin_inset space ~
50485 \begin_inset space ~
50489 \begin_inset space ~
50493 \begin_inset space ~
50496 changes Removes all manually set
50502 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50503 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50505 \begin_inset space ~
50510 dialog when changing the document class.
50513 \begin_layout Section
50515 \begin_inset space ~
50519 \begin_inset Index idx
50522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50531 \begin_layout Subsection
50533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50535 name "subsec:Converters"
50540 \begin_inset Index idx
50543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50552 \begin_layout Standard
50553 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
50554 from one format to another.
50555 You can modify converters or create new ones.
50556 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
50563 \begin_inset space ~
50568 field and press the
50573 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
50577 \begin_inset space ~
50582 drop-down list, modify the
50586 field and press the
50593 \begin_layout Standard
50596 Converter File Cache
50602 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
50604 Maximum Age (in days
50607 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
50608 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
50611 \begin_layout Standard
50612 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
50613 definition, is described in the section
50624 \begin_layout Subsection
50626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50628 name "sec:File-Formats"
50633 \begin_inset Index idx
50636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50643 \begin_inset Index idx
50646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50655 \begin_layout Standard
50656 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
50666 programs that should be used for certain formats.
50669 \begin_layout Standard
50670 You can also define the
50672 Default output format
50674 that is used when you use
50676 View, Update, View Master Document
50680 Update Master Document
50686 menu or the toolbar.
50689 \begin_layout Standard
50690 More about formats and their options is described in the section
50701 \begin_layout Standard
50702 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
50704 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
50705 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
50706 This is done by specifying a
50711 More about this is described in the section
50722 \begin_layout Chapter
50723 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
50725 \begin_inset Index idx
50728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50737 name "chap:Units-available-in"
50744 \begin_layout Standard
50746 \begin_inset space ~
50750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50752 reference "tab:Units"
50756 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
50757 and used in this documentation.
50760 \begin_layout Standard
50761 \begin_inset Float table
50768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50769 \begin_inset Caption Standard
50771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50787 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
50793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50795 \begin_inset Tabular
50796 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
50797 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
50798 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
50799 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
50800 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
50802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50850 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50883 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50949 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50953 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
50957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51155 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51188 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51192 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51224 scaled point (65536
51225 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51229 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51292 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
51297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51416 % of original image width
51421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51505 \begin_layout Standard
51506 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
51509 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
51516 \begin_layout Bibliography
51517 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51518 LatexCommand bibitem
51525 The \SpecialChar LyX
51527 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51530 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
51536 \begin_inset Newline newline
51540 \begin_inset Flex URL
51543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51545 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
51553 \begin_layout Bibliography
51554 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51555 LatexCommand bibitem
51556 key "latexcompanion"
51561 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
51563 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
51564 Companion Second Edition.
51567 Addison-Wesley, 2004
51570 \begin_layout Bibliography
51571 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51572 LatexCommand bibitem
51578 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
51581 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
51585 Addison-Wesley, 2003
51588 \begin_layout Bibliography
51589 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51590 LatexCommand bibitem
51599 : A Document Preparation System.
51602 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
51605 \begin_layout Bibliography
51606 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51607 LatexCommand bibitem
51617 The \SpecialChar TeX
51621 Addison-Wesley, 1984
51624 \begin_layout Bibliography
51625 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51626 LatexCommand bibitem
51632 The \SpecialChar TeX
51634 \begin_inset Newline newline
51638 \begin_inset Flex URL
51641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51643 https://ctan.org/topic
51651 \begin_layout Bibliography
51652 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51653 LatexCommand bibitem
51659 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
51661 \begin_inset Newline newline
51665 \begin_inset Flex URL
51668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51670 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
51678 \begin_layout Bibliography
51679 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51680 LatexCommand bibitem
51687 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51689 name "Documentation"
51690 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
51697 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51701 \begin_inset Newline newline
51705 \begin_inset Flex URL
51708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51710 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
51718 \begin_layout Bibliography
51719 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51720 LatexCommand bibitem
51727 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51729 name "Documentation"
51730 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
51735 how to use the program
51737 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51741 \begin_inset Newline newline
51745 \begin_inset Flex URL
51748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51750 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
51758 \begin_layout Bibliography
51759 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51760 LatexCommand bibitem
51767 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51769 name "Documentation"
51770 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
51775 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51781 \begin_inset Index idx
51784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51786 packages ! biblatex
51792 \begin_inset Newline newline
51796 \begin_inset Flex URL
51799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51801 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
51809 \begin_layout Bibliography
51810 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51811 LatexCommand bibitem
51818 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51820 name "Documentation"
51821 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
51826 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51832 \begin_inset Index idx
51835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51843 \begin_inset Newline newline
51847 \begin_inset Flex URL
51850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51852 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
51860 \begin_layout Bibliography
51861 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51862 LatexCommand bibitem
51869 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51871 name "Documentation"
51872 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
51882 \begin_inset Newline newline
51886 \begin_inset Flex URL
51889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51891 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
51899 \begin_layout Bibliography
51900 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51901 LatexCommand bibitem
51902 key "makeindex-man"
51908 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51911 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
51921 \begin_inset Newline newline
51925 \begin_inset Flex URL
51928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51930 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
51938 \begin_layout Bibliography
51939 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51940 LatexCommand bibitem
51947 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51949 name "Documentation"
51950 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
51960 \begin_inset Newline newline
51964 \begin_inset Flex URL
51967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51969 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
51977 \begin_layout Bibliography
51978 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51979 LatexCommand bibitem
51986 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51988 name "Documentation"
51989 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
51994 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
51996 \begin_inset Newline newline
52000 \begin_inset Flex URL
52003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52005 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
52013 \begin_layout Bibliography
52014 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52015 LatexCommand bibitem
52022 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52024 name "Documentation"
52025 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
52030 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52036 \begin_inset Index idx
52039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52047 \begin_inset Newline newline
52051 \begin_inset Flex URL
52054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52056 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
52064 \begin_layout Bibliography
52065 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52066 LatexCommand bibitem
52073 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52075 name "Documentation"
52076 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
52081 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52087 \begin_inset Index idx
52090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52092 packages ! enumitem
52098 \begin_inset Newline newline
52102 \begin_inset Flex URL
52105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52107 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
52115 \begin_layout Bibliography
52116 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52117 LatexCommand bibitem
52124 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52126 name "Documentation"
52127 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
52132 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52138 \begin_inset Index idx
52141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52143 packages ! fancyhdr
52149 \begin_inset Newline newline
52153 \begin_inset Flex URL
52156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52158 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
52166 \begin_layout Bibliography
52167 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52168 LatexCommand bibitem
52175 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52177 name "Documentation"
52178 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
52183 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52189 \begin_inset Index idx
52192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52194 packages ! hyperref
52200 \begin_inset Newline newline
52204 \begin_inset Flex URL
52207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52209 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
52217 \begin_layout Bibliography
52218 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52219 LatexCommand bibitem
52226 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52228 name "Documentation"
52229 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
52234 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52240 \begin_inset Index idx
52243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52245 packages ! microtpye
52251 \begin_inset Newline newline
52255 \begin_inset Flex URL
52258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52260 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
52268 \begin_layout Bibliography
52269 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52270 LatexCommand bibitem
52277 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52279 name "Documentation"
52280 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
52285 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52291 \begin_inset Index idx
52294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52302 \begin_inset Newline newline
52306 \begin_inset Flex URL
52309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52311 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
52319 \begin_layout Bibliography
52320 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52321 LatexCommand bibitem
52328 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52330 name "Documentation"
52331 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
52336 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52342 \begin_inset Index idx
52345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52347 packages ! prettyref
52353 \begin_inset Newline newline
52357 \begin_inset Flex URL
52360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52362 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
52370 \begin_layout Bibliography
52371 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52372 LatexCommand bibitem
52379 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52381 name "Documentation"
52382 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
52387 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52393 \begin_inset Index idx
52396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52398 packages ! refstyle
52404 \begin_inset Newline newline
52408 \begin_inset Flex URL
52411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52413 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
52421 \begin_layout Bibliography
52422 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52423 LatexCommand bibitem
52430 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52433 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
52438 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52440 \begin_inset Newline newline
52444 \begin_inset Flex URL
52447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52449 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
52457 \begin_layout Bibliography
52458 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52459 LatexCommand bibitem
52466 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52469 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
52474 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52476 \begin_inset Newline newline
52480 \begin_inset Flex URL
52483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52485 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
52493 \begin_layout Bibliography
52494 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52495 LatexCommand bibitem
52502 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52505 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
52510 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52511 for Cyrillic languages:
52512 \begin_inset Newline newline
52516 \begin_inset Flex URL
52519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52521 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
52529 \begin_layout Bibliography
52530 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52531 LatexCommand bibitem
52538 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52541 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
52546 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52548 \begin_inset Newline newline
52552 \begin_inset Flex URL
52555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52557 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
52565 \begin_layout Bibliography
52566 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52567 LatexCommand bibitem
52574 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52577 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
52582 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52584 \begin_inset Newline newline
52588 \begin_inset Flex URL
52591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52593 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
52601 \begin_layout Bibliography
52602 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52603 LatexCommand bibitem
52610 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52613 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
52618 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52620 \begin_inset Newline newline
52624 \begin_inset Flex URL
52627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52629 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
52637 \begin_layout Standard
52638 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
52645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52672 \begin_inset Note Note
52675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52682 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
52683 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
52684 bibliography is the second one:
52692 \begin_layout Standard
52693 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
52694 LatexCommand bibtex
52695 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
52696 options "biblio/alphadin"
52703 \begin_layout Standard
52704 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52708 \begin_layout Standard
52712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52718 pagedeclaration}[1]{
52721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52727 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
52735 \begin_inset Note Note
52738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52739 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
52740 \begin_inset space ~
52744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52746 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
52758 \begin_layout Standard
52759 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
52760 LatexCommand printnomenclature
52766 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
52767 LatexCommand printindex